MX-M450U Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax

PART 1: GENERAL INFORMATION

• BEFORE USING

THE PRODUCT

•

MANAGING THE MACHINE

• PERIPHERAL DEVICES

PART 2: COPIER OPERATION

• MAKING COPIES

• CONVENIENT COPY

FUNCTIONS

•

MACHINE MAINTENANCE

(FOR COPYING)

• DOCUMENT FILING

FUNCTION

•

SPECIFICATIONS

1-1

2-1

3-1

4-1

5-1

6-1

7-1

8-1

Page

OPERATION MANUAL

(for general information and copier operation)

MODEL

MX-M350U

MX-M450U

MX-M350N

MX-M450N

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEMMX-M350U/MX-M450U/MX-M350N/MX-M450N

LASER PRINTER

KS1

CZZ

MX-M350U/MX-M450U/MX-M350N/MX-M450N

OPERATION MANUAL

(for general information and copier operation)

Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to

gain the maximum benefit from the product.

Before installing this product, be sure to read the

installation requirements and cautions sections.

Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference

including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general

information and copier operation)" and operation manuals

for any optional equipment which has been installed.

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Each instruction also covers the optional units used with these products.

The power switch positions are marked " I " to indicate power "ON" and " " to indicate stand-by.

Caution:

For complete electrical disconnection, pull out the main plug.

The socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible.

FOR YOUR RECORDS ...

To protect against loss or theft, record and retain for reference the

machine's serial number located on the back of the unit.

Model Number

Serial Number

Date of Purchase

Place of Purchase

Authorized Sharp Copier

Service Department Number

This operation manual is also used for the MX-350 / MX-450 / MX-350 J /

MX-450 J / MX-M350U J / MX-M450U J / MX-M350N J / MX-M450N J.

Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain

compliance with EMC regulations.

FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to

this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING:

For users in the USA

Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when

the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a

residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user

will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Trademark acknowledgments

The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and

accessories.

•Microsoft

, Windows

98, Windows

Me, Windows NT

4.0, Windows

2000, Windows

XP, Windows

Server

2003 and Internet Explorer

are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other

countries.

• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple

Computer, Inc.

• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.

• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe

Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.

• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.

• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.

• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv,

Garamond and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus,

Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United

States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph,

Mona Lisa, Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United

States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima,

Palatino, Stempel Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered

in certain jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger

Druckmaschinen AG. Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh Company,

Ltd. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and other countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Antique

Olive is a trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark of Johnathan

Hoefler and may be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation registered in the

United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark of the Agfa-Gevaert

Group and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc.

registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Macintosh and

TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and other countries.

PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL, FontSmart and

LaserJet are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1 processor resident

in Monotype Imaging's UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of

their respective owners.

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Part 1: General Information

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

0-1

Warranty

While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP Corporation makes

no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. SHARP

is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related to the use of this operation manual.

written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.

PRODUCT CONFIGURATIONS

This product series consists of the models listed below. The product configuration varies by model.

The peripheral devices required to use each of the functions are indicated.

NOTES

● Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the

manual, please contact your nearest SHARP Service Department.

● This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect

or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.

● Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the

product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for

any damage that occurs due to use of the product.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine

due to product improvements and modifications.

Model Function Required peripheral devices

MX-M350U/

MX-M450U

Copier Standard

Printer Standard

Network printer Network expansion kit

Facsimile Facsimile expansion kit

Network scanner Network expansion kit, network scanner expansion kit

Internet fax

Network expansion kit (with hard drive), network scanner

expansion kit, Internet fax expansion kit

Document filing Network expansion kit (with hard drive)

Metadata send

Network expansion kit (with hard drive), network scanner

expansion kit, application integration module

MX-M350N/

MX-M450N

Copier Standard

Printer Standard

Network printer Standard

Facsimile Facsimile expansion kit

Network scanner Network scanner expansion kit

Internet fax Network scanner expansion kit, Internet fax expansion kit

Document filing Standard

Metadata send

Network scanner expansion kit,

application integration module

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

0-2

OPERATION MANUALS

The following operation manuals are provided for the machine. Please read the appropriate manuals as needed for

the features you wish to learn about.

● Operation manual (for general information and copier operation) (this manual):

The first half of this manual provides general information about the machine, including safety information, loading

paper, removing misfeeds, and regular maintenance.

The second half of the manual explains how to use the copy and document filing functions.

● Administrator settings guide

The administrator settings are used by the administrator of the machine to configure functions to meet the needs

of your workplace.

This guide explains administrator settings for machine management, copying, and document filing. Administrator

settings for the fax, printer, network scanner and Internet fax functions are explained in the manuals for those

functions.

● Software setup guide

This manual mainly explains how to install and configure the software that allows the machine to be used as a

printer.

● Operation manual (for printer)*

This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer.

● Operation manual (for image send)*

This manual explains the procedures for using the image send feature of the machine, including the network

scanner and Internet fax functions.

* The Operation manual (for printer) and the Operation manual (for image send) are provided as PDF files in the

CD-ROM.

These manuals are not provided as printed manuals.

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

0-3

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the

machine is moved.

1.The machine should be installed near an

accessible power outlet for easy connection.

2.Be sure to connect the power cord only to a

power outlet that meets the specified voltage and

current requirements. Also make certain the

outlet is properly grounded.

●For the power supply requirements, see the

name plate on the back of the main unit.

3.Do not install your machine in areas that are:

●damp, humid, or very dusty

●exposed to direct sunlight

●poorly ventilated

●subject to extreme temperature or humidity

changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.

4.Be sure to allow the required space around the

machine for servicing and proper ventilation.

A small amount of ozone is produced within the machine during operation. The emission level is insufficient to

cause any health hazard.

NOTE:

The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m

) calculated as an 8 hr. time-

weighted average concentration.

However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier

in a ventilated area.

23-5/8"

(60cm)

31-1/2"

(80cm)

11-13/16" (30cm)

23-5/8"(60cm)

00.fm 3 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時２０分

0-4

CAUTIONS

1.Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the

drum will cause dirty prints.

2.The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.

3.Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your

eyes.

4.Five adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer units.

These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor.

When moving the machine with the optional stand/paper drawer, be

sure to raise the adjusters. Also, unlock the two casters at the front of

the optional stand/paper drawer. After moving the machine, lower the

four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters.

5.Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in

personal injury or damage to the machine.

6.Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be moved by

more than one person to prevent injury.

7.When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first turn both

the computer and the machine off.

8.Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law.

The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national

law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.

●

Money

●

Stamps

●

Bonds

●

Stocks

●

Bank drafts

●

Checks

●

Passports

●

Driver's licenses

The part indicated in the illustration is only to be handled by a service technician.

Absolutely do not touch this part.

Some models include the document filing function, which stores document image data on the machine’s hard disk.

Stored documents can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. If a hard disk failure occurs, it will no

longer be possible to call up the stored document data. To prevent the loss of important documents in the unlikely

event of a hard disk failure, keep the originals of important documents or store the original data elsewhere.

With the exception of instances provided for by law, Sharp Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages

or loss due to the loss of stored document data.

"BATTERY DISPOSAL"

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE

DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED SERVICE

REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.

This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.

Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:

www.eia.org

Fusing unit

Adjuster

Lock

Release

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

0-5

Laser Information

Wave length

785 nm

+10 nm

-15 nm

Pulse times North America: 35 cpm model: (4.1 µs ± 4.1 ns)/7 mm

45 cpm model: (5.7 µs ± 5.7 ns)/7 mm

Europe: 35 cpm model: (3.8 µs ± 3.8 ns)/7 mm

45 cpm model: (4.4 µs ± 4.4 ns)/7 mm

Output power 0.2 mW - 0.4 mW

At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.4 MILLIWATT PLUS 8 % and is maintained

constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).

Caution

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

For North America:

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This

means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.

● Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.

● The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by

inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.

This product utilizes a CR coin Lithium battery which contains a Perchlorate material. Special handling for this material may

apply, California residents, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

Others, consult local environmental officers.

For Europe:

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT

CAUTION

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS

DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE

TO BEAM.

VORSICHT

UNSICHTBARE

LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN

ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND

SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG

ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM

STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

ADVARSEL

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING

VED ÅBNING, NÅR

SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER

UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ

UDSAETTELSE FOR

STRÅLNING.

VAROITUS!

LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN

MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ

KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA

MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA

ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN

TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1

YLITTÄVÄLLE

NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE

LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

VARNING

OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ

ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA

BRUKSANVISNING

SPECIFICERATS, KAN

ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,

SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN

FÖR LASERKLASS 1.

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1

CAUTION

VORSICHT

ADVARSEL

ADVERSEL

VARNING

VARO!

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

Laserstrahl

UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND

SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER

UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.

USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.

UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR

URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ

LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

0-6

CONTENTS

Page

PRODUCT CONFIGURATIONS...................................0-1

OPERATION MANUALS ..............................................0-2

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...............................0-3

CAUTIONS...................................................................0-4

● Laser Information..................................................0-5

CONTENTS..................................................................0-6

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT

INTRODUCTION..........................................................1-2

MAIN FEATURES.........................................................1-3

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS................................1-9

● Exterior .................................................................1-9

● Interior ..................................................................1-10

● Part names and functions of peripheral devices...1-11

● Operation panel....................................................1-13

● Touch panel ..........................................................1-14

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF .......................1-17

AUDITING MODE.........................................................1-18

● Using the machine when the auditing mode is

enabled.................................................................1-18

CHAPTER 2

MANAGING THE MACHINE

LOADING PAPER.........................................................2-2

● Loading paper in paper tray 1...............................2-2

● Changing the paper size in paper tray 1...............2-2

● Specifications of paper trays.................................2-3

● Setting the paper type and paper size..................2-5

● Setting the paper size when a special size is

loaded...................................................................2-6

● Programming and editing paper types..................2-7

● Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer ..........2-8

● Specifications (multi purpose drawer) ..................2-10

● Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper

drawer...................................................................2-10

● Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper

drawer) .................................................................2-10

● Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer ........................................................2-11

● Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper

drawer) .................................................................2-11

SYSTEM SETTINGS....................................................2-12

● General procedure for system settings.................2-12

● About the settings.................................................2-14

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE.....................2-15

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES............................................2-16

MISFEED REMOVAL ...................................................2-17

● Misfeed removal guidance....................................2-17

● Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and

exit area................................................................2-18

● Misfeed in the duplex module...............................2-19

● Misfeed in the paper feed area.............................2-20

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED.........................2-22

● Removing a misfed original from the automatic

document feeder...................................................2-22

TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................2-23

CHAPTER 3

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

DUPLEX MODULE ...................................................... 3-2

● Part names........................................................... 3-2

● Specifications....................................................... 3-2

● Loading paper in the bypass tray......................... 3-3

●

Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module)

.. 3-4

MAIL-BIN STACKER.................................................... 3-5

● Part names........................................................... 3-5

● Specifications....................................................... 3-5

● Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker............................. 3-6

FINISHER.................................................................... 3-7

● Part names........................................................... 3-7

● Specifications....................................................... 3-7

● Finisher functions................................................. 3-8

● Using the finisher functions.................................. 3-9

● Staple cartridge replacement............................... 3-10

● Misfeed in the finisher.......................................... 3-12

● Troubleshooting finisher problems ....................... 3-13

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER....................................... 3-14

● Part names........................................................... 3-14

● Specifications....................................................... 3-14

● Saddle stitch finisher functions ............................ 3-15

● Using the saddle stitch finisher ............................ 3-18

●

Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal....

3-19

● Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher ..................... 3-22

●

Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher) ...

3-24

SHARP OSA................................................................ 3-25

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)

3-25

● Standard application setup

........................................

3-25

● Selecting a standard application

..............................

3-25

● Operation in OSA mode

.............................................

3-26

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)........... 3-27

● External account application setup

..........................

3-27

● Operation in external account mode

........................

3-27

CHAPTER 4

MAKING COPIES

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER........................... 4-2

● Acceptable originals............................................. 4-2

PLACING ORIGINALS................................................. 4-3

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL...... 4-5

● Manually setting the scanning size ...................... 4-5

STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES

4-6

● Storing or deleting an original size....................... 4-6

NORMAL COPYING.................................................... 4-7

● Making copies with the automatic document

feeder................................................................... 4-7

● Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic

document feeder .................................................. 4-10

● Copying from the document glass ....................... 4-11

● Automatic two-sided copying from the document

glass .................................................................... 4-13

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE ................................... 4-14

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM ....................... 4-15

● Automatic selection (auto image)......................... 4-15

● Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom)......... 4-16

● XY ZOOM ............................................................ 4-18

SPECIAL PAPERS ...................................................... 4-20

00.fm 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時１１分

CONTENTS

0-7

CHAPTER 5

CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS

SPECIAL MODES........................................................5-2

● General procedure for using special functions ..... 5-2

● Margin shift........................................................... 5-3

● Erase....................................................................5-4

● Dual page copy .................................................... 5-5

● Pamphlet copy......................................................5-6

● Job build............................................................... 5-8

● Tandem copy........................................................ 5-10

● Covers/inserts ......................................................5-12

● Transparency film with insert sheets .................... 5-23

● Multi shot..............................................................5-24

● Book copy.............................................................5-26

● Card shot

..................................................................

5-27

● Mirror image .........................................................5-29

● B/W reverse..........................................................5-29

● Print menu............................................................ 5-30

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB

PROGRAMS ................................................................5-42

● Storing a job program...........................................5-42

● Calling up a job program ......................................5-43

● Deleting a stored job program .............................. 5-43

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN ................................... 5-44

CHAPTER 6

MACHINE MAINTENANCE (FOR

COPYING)

USER MAINTENANCE................................................ 6-2

● Cleaning the document glass and the automatic

document feeder ..................................................6-2

● Cleaning the main charger of the

photoconductive drum..........................................6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................6-3

CHAPTER 7

DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

OVERVIEW ..................................................................7-2

● Document filing function.......................................7-2

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..........7-4

● A look at the operation panel................................7-4

● Saving files...........................................................7-4

● Main screen of document filing ............................ 7-5

● Document filing icons ...........................................7-5

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE.......................... 7-6

● Quick File .............................................................7-6

● Filing..................................................................... 7-7

● Print jobs ..............................................................7-9

● Scan Save ............................................................7-10

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE............................... 7-13

● Searching for and calling up a saved file

...............

7-13

● Calling up and using a saved file..........................7-15

● File selection screen ............................................7-16

SYSTEM SETTINGS ...................................................7-24

●

Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders....

7-24

ENTERING CHARACTERS.........................................7-29

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 7-31

CHAPTER 8

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................8-2

LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES ...

8-4

INDEX...........................................................................8-5

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

1-1

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING THE

PRODUCT

This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using

the product.

Page

INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 1-2

MAIN FEATURES ................................................................................... 1-3

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS........................................................... 1-9

●

Exterior............................................................................................ 1-9

●

Interior............................................................................................. 1-10

●

Part names and functions of peripheral devices ............................. 1-11

●

Operation panel............................................................................... 1-13

●

Touch panel..................................................................................... 1-14

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.................................................. 1-17

AUDITING MODE ................................................................................... 1-18

●

Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled.................. 1-18

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

1-2

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a SHARP digital multifunction copier.

Please read this manual before using the machine. In particular, be sure to read "INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS"

before using the machine.

Please keep this manual close at hand for reference whenever necessary.

This manual provides general information on using the machine, such as routine maintenance and how to load paper

and remove misfeeds. It also explains how to use the copier and document filing functions.

Separate manuals have been provided for the fax function, printer function, and network scanner function.

■ Original and paper sizes

This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the inch and AB systems.

These are shown in the tables below.

■ The meaning of "R" in original and paper size indications

Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate

between landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an "R". These are indicated

as 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A4R, B5R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (11"

x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3, B4) do not contain the "R" in their size indication.

Sizes in the inch system Sizes in the AB system

11" x 17" (LEDGER) A3

8-1/2" x 14" (LEGAL) B4

8-1/2" x 13" (FOOLSCAP) A4

8-1/2" x 11" (LETTER) B5

7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (EXECUTIVE) A5

5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (INVOICE)

Size indication

with "R"

Landscape

orientation

Size indication

without "R"

Portrait orientation

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

1-3

MAIN FEATURES

The digital multifunction copier is capable of performing a variety of functions. This page shows features related to

the copy function.

● Sort mode See page 1-3

● Group mode See page 1-3

● 2-sided Copy See page 1-3

(When the duplex module is installed.)

● Exposure Adjustments See page 1-3

● Reduction/Enlargement See page 1-4

● XY Zoom See page 1-4

● Margin Shift See page 1-4

● Erase See page 1-4

● Dual Page Copy See page 1-4

● Pamphlet Copy See page 1-4

● Job Build See page 1-5

● Tandem Copy See page 1-5

(MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the network

function has been added.)

● Covers/inserts See page 1-5

● Transparency Insert See page 1-5

● Multi Shot See page 1-5

● Book Copy See page 1-5

● Card Shot See page 1-6

● Job programs See page 1-6

● Mirror Image See page 1-6

● B/W Reverse See page 1-6

● Date See page 1-6

● Stamp See page 1-6

● Page numbering See page 1-7

● Text See page 1-7

● Interrupting a copy run See page 1-7

● Offset mode See page 1-7

(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

● Staple sort mode See page 1-7

(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

● Saddle stitch See page 1-7

(When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)

● Hole punching See page 1-8

(When the Saddle stitch finisher and Punch

Module are installed.)

● Document filing function See page 1-8

(MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document

filing function has been added.)

Sort mode See page 4-9

Copies can be collated.

Group mode See page 4-9

Copies can be grouped by page.

2-sided Copy See pages 4-10, 4-13

Copy onto both sides of the paper using the document

glass or the automatic document feeder.

Exposure Adjustments See page 4-14

The desired image type for the original can be

selected.

Original

Copy

Original Copy

Original

Copy

* When the duplex module is installed.

Exposure

Text Text/Photo Photo

Resolution

ABCDE

DarkerLighter

Copy_SEC.book 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MAIN FEATURES

1-4

Reduction / Enlargement See page 4-15

Copies can be enlarged or reduced to the desired

size.

XY Zoom See page 4-18

Separate ratio settings can be selected for the

length and width of a copy.

Margin Shift See page 5-3

Margins can be added to copies.

Erase See page 5-4

Shadows that appear around the edges of copies of

books or thick originals can be erased.

Dual Page Copy See page 5-5

The left and right pages of a book can be

successively copied onto separate sheets.

Pamphlet Copy See page 5-6

One-sided or two-sided pamphlet style copies can

be made.

Original

Enlargement Reduction

Copy

Original Copy

Image shifted

to the right

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

One-sided copying

Original

Two-sided copying

Original

Image shifted

to the right

Margin

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

Original

Copy

Edge erase

Center erase

Edge+Center

erase

CopyBook original

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Originals (one-sided)

Originals (two-sided)

Left binding

Right binding

First page

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MAIN FEATURES

1-5

Job Build See page 5-8

When you have a very large number of originals, the

pages can be scanned in sets.

Tandem Copy See page 5-10

Two machines can be used to run a large copy job

in parallel.

Covers/inserts See page 5-12

Front covers, back covers, and inserts can be

added. These can also be copied on.

Transparency Insert See page 5-23

Inserts can be automatically inserted between

transparencies.

Multi Shot See page 5-24

Multiple original pages can be copied onto a

single sheet of paper in a uniform layout.

Book Copy See page 5-26

Books and other bound originals can be copied

pamphlet style.

50 sheets100 sheets 50 sheets

100 sets of

copies

50 sets of

copies

50 sets of

copies

* MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when

the network function has been added

Front cover

Back cover

Originals

Insert sheets

Originals (1-sided)

Originals (2-sided)

Copy

Originals

(1-sided)

Originals

(2-sided)

Copy

CopyOriginal

Left binding

Right binding

First page

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MAIN FEATURES

1-6

Card Shot See page 5-27

The front and back of a card can be copied onto

one sheet of paper.

This function is convenient for making copies for

certification purposes and helps save paper.

Job programs See page 5-42

Various steps of a copy operation can be stored

as a program, and up to 10 programs can be

stored. Saving frequently used sets of settings in a

program saves you the trouble of selecting those

settings each time you wish to use them.

Mirror Image See page 5-29

A mirror image copy can be made.

B/W Reverse See page 5-29

White and black can be inverted on a copy to

produce a negative image.

Date See page 5-33

The date can be added to copies.

Stamp See page 5-34

Reverse text can be added to copies ("stamp").

Original

Example:

Portrait

8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

size

Example:

Landscape

8-1/2" x 11"(A4)

size

Copy

Back of

card

Front of

card

CARD

JOB PROGRAMS

PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL

Original Copy

2010/APR/4

CONFIDENTIAL

Copy_SEC.book 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MAIN FEATURES

1-7

Page numbering See page 5-35

Page numbers can be added to copies.

Text See page 5-39

Entered text can be added to copies.

Interrupting a copy run See page 5-44

A copy job in progress can be interrupted for a

rush job.

Offset mode See page 3-8

Each set of output can be offset slightly from other

sets for easy separation.

Staple sort mode See page 3-8, 3-16

Sets of copies can be automatically stapled.

Saddle stitch See page 3-14

When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies

can be automatically folded in half and stapled at

the fold. (Use with the pamphlet function (see

page 5-6) or book copy function (see page 5-26).)

Meeting

AUTO

ORIGINA

EXPOSUR

INTERRUPT

ORIGINAL

8 x11

Offset mode Non-Offset mode

*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is

installed.

Original

Copy

*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is

installed.

Saddle stitch binding

*When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MAIN FEATURES

1-8

Hole punching See page 3-17

Copies can be punched to add holes.

Document filing function See CHAPTER 7

A document image can be stored on the hard disk.

A stored file can easily be called up and printed or

transmitted.

Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when used with a duplexer.

Energy saving features

This product has the following two power reducing modes to help conserve natural resources and reduce

environmental pollution.

Preheat mode

When the machine remains in the standby state for the amount of time set in the administrator settings, preheat

mode automatically reduces the temperature of the fusing unit to save power while the machine is on standby.

When a fax or print job is received, or keys are pressed on the operation panel, or an original is placed for

a copy, fax, or network scanner job, preheat mode automatically turns off.

Auto power shut-off mode

The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this mode power is shut off to the

fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to

recover to the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be set by a

dministrator

setting.

When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated

automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has

reached the ready temperature.

When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode

will be deactivated as above by an incoming print job. Either mode will also be deactivated by operation of

DOCUMENT FILING, IMAGE SEND or COPY mode key.

Original Punch positions

* When the saddle stitch finisher and punch

module are installed.

Save to

machine's

hard disk

HDD

Document

Image

Call up a

saved file to

reuse

Printed

Transmitted

* MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document

filing function has been added

Products that have earned the ENERGY STAR

are designed to protect the environment

through superior energy efficiency.

The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to the products only in Canada. The

products that meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo shown to the left.

The products without the logo may not meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines.

01.fm 8 ページ２００７年４月５日　木曜日　午後５時２４分

1-9

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Exterior

(1) Bypass tray*

(2) Exit tray*

(3) Automatic document feeder (See page 4-2.)

This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet

originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be

scanned at once.

(4) Duplex module*

Module for two-sided printing

(5) Upper paper output area (Center tray)

Finished sheets are deposited here.

(6) Upper exit tray extension*

Provides support for large size paper.

(7) Operation panel

(8) Front cover

Open to add toner.

(9) Power switch

Press to turn power on and off.

(

)Paper tray 1

(11)

Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer*

(12)

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer* (See

page 2-11.)

(13)

Multi purpose drawer* (See page 2-8.)

* (1), (2), (4),

(

)

(11)

, (

) and

(13)

are peripheral devices. For description of these devices, see page 1-11.

Peripheral devices are basically optional, but some are provided as standard equipment for some models.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

01.fm 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時１６分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-10

Interior

(

) Duplex module side cover

Open when a misfeed has occurred in the duplex

module.

(

) Side cover latch

Push up to open the side cover when a misfeed

has occurred in the main unit.

(

) Fusing unit

Lift up to open the side cover when a misfeed has

occurred in the main unit.

(

) Toner cartridge (drum/toner cartridge)

The toner cartridge must be replaced when

indicated on the operation panel. (See page 2-15)

(

) Photoconductive drum

Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.

(

) Cartridge lock lever

When replacing the drum, toner or developer

cartridge, turn down this lever and pull it out.

(14) (15) (16) (17)

(18) (19)

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed

paper.

NOTE

Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.

01.fm 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時１８分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-11

Part names and functions of peripheral devices

(1) Upper exit tray extension (AR-TE4)

Mount this unit to the upper paper exit tray. This

extension is needed to support large size paper.

(2) Finisher (AR-FN6)

Output sheets can either be sorted in page order

or grouped by page. Sorted sets or groups are

offset stacked for easy separation when removed.

Sorted sets can be delivered either stapled or

unstapled.

(3) Right output tray (AR-TE5)

Attaches to the output outlet on the right side of

the machine.

(4) Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)

This unit is an output sorter that has seven

receiving bins.

The bin to receive printed output can be selected

in the printer driver. Each bin can be assigned to

receive printed output by an individual person or

by groups of people so that their prints are

separated from other users making them easy to

retrieve.

When this unit is installed, any copies or facsimile

prints will be sent to the top tray and not into the

mail bins.

(5) Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D28)

This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-

purpose drawer (see item (6)) and a lower drawer

which can hold a maximum of 2000 sheets of 20

lbs. (80 g/m

) paper.

(6) Multi purpose drawer (AR-MU2)

Up to 500 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m

) paper can be

loaded. Also special papers such as envelopes

(standard sizes only) and postcards can be set.

(7) Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer (AR-D27)

This paper feed unit contains an upper multi-

purpose drawer (see item (6)) and two lower

drawers each of which can hold a maximum of

500 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m

) paper.

(8) Saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7)

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place

two staples for centerline binding of paper and fold

them along the centerline.

An optional punch module is available for

installation into the finisher.

(9) Duplex module (AR-DU3)

An optional duplex module must be installed for

automatic two-sided printing.

(

) Duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4)

This module is basically the same as (9) above

with the addition of a manual bypass paper feed

unit.

(

) Exit tray (AR-TE3)

Mounted to the paper output port of a duplex

module.

(1)

(2)

(11)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

01.fm 11 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時２分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-12

■ Other optional equipment

●Network expansion kit (MX-NBX2)

This is required to add on the network function.

When this expansion kit is installed, the machine

can be used as a network printer.

●Network expansion kit (MX-NBX3)

Required to add the network function and a hard

drive to the machine. Installing this expansion kit

allows the machine to be used as a printer and

enables use of the document filing function.

●Barcode font kit (AR-PF1)

This kit adds bar code fonts to the machine.

●Data security kit (MX-FRX6, MX-FRX6U, MX-

FRX7, MX-FRX7U)

The MX-FRX6 and MX-FRX6U are for models that

have a hard disk drive, and the MX-FRX7 and MX-

FRX7U are for models without a hard disk drive.

This kit is used to erase electronic data from the

hard disk and memory immediately after a

document is printed or transmitted.

●PS3 expansion kit (AR-PK6)

This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3

to the printer.

●Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX12)

This kit is required to add fax function.

●Additional fax memory (8MB) (AR-MM9)

●Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1)

This kit is required to add the network scanning

feature.

To add the network scanner function to the MX-

M350U, or MX-M450U, the network expansion kit

is required.

●Internet fax expansion kit (MX-FWX1)

This kit is required to use the Internet fax function.

To add on the Internet fax function, the network

scanner expansion kit is required. On the MX-

M350U/MX-M450U, the network expansion kit

(with hard drive) is also required.

●Application integration module (MX-AMX1)

The application integration module can be

combined with the network scanner function to

append a metadata file to a scanned image file.

●

Application communication module (MX-AMX2)

This allows the machine to be linked over a network

to an external software application.

●

External account module (MX-AMX3)

This is required to use an external account

application on the machine.

●Flash ROM kit (AR-PF2)

This kit contains download fonts.

Some peripheral devices cannot be installed together while others may require the installation of one or more others

to be functional. See page 8-4, "LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES".

Peripheral devices are basically optional, but some are provided as standard equipment for some models.

Copy_SEC.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-13

Operation panel

(1) Touch panel

The machine status, messages and touch keys are

displayed on the panel. The document filing*

copy, network scanner*

, fax*

, and Internet fax*

functions are used by switching to the screen for

the desired function. See the following page.

(2) Mode select keys and indicators

Use to change modes and the corresponding

display on the touch panel.

[DOCUMENT FILING] key

Press to select the document filing mode*

. (See

page 7-5.)

When the document filing function has not been

added, this key is the [PRINT] key. This key is

pressed to change to the print mode screen.

[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator

Press to change the display to network scanner

mode*

, fax mode*

or Internet fax mode*

. (See

the "Operation manual (for image send)") and

"Operation manual (for facsimile)".)

[COPY] key

Press to select the copy mode.

(3) PRINT mode indicators

READY indicator

Print data can be received when this indicator is lit.

DATA indicator

Lights up or blinks when print data is being

received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is

being performed.

(4) [JOB STATUS] key

Press to display the current job status. (See page 1-15.)

(5) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

This is used to store, edit, and delete user names

and folder names for the document filing function*

and to configure the administrator settings and

printer configuration settings. (See page 7-24)

(6) Numeric keys

Use to enter numeric values for various settings.

(7) [ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode*

, network scanner mode*

, fax mode*

, and

Internet fax mode*

(8) [#/P] key

This is used as a program key when using the copy

function, and to dial when using the fax function*

(9) [C] key (Clear key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode

, network scanner mode*

, and fax mode*

(10)

[START] key

Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a

document in network scanner mode*

, or scan a

document for transmission in fax mode*

or Internet

fax mode*

(11)

[CA] key (Clear all key)

This key is used in copy mode, document filing

mode

, network scanner mode*

, fax mode*

, and

Internet fax mode*

. Use the key to cancel settings

and perform an operation from the initial machine

*1 MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

*2 When the network scanner option is installed.

*3 When the fax option is installed.

*4 When the Internet fax option is installed.

LOGOUT

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

When the document filing

function has not been

added.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(10) (11)

01.fm 13 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時２２分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-14

Touch panel

The touch panel screens shown in this manual are

printed images, and may appear different from the

actual screens.

■ Using the touch panel

[Example 1]

Items on the touch panel

are easily selectable by

touching the key

associated with the item

with a finger. Selection

of an item will be

accompanied with a

beep tone* to confirm

the item was selected.

Also, the key area for the item will be highlighted

for visual confirmation.

* If a grayed out key is touched, double beeps will

sound.

[Example 2]

Keys which are grayed

out on any screen are

not selectable.

The confirmation beeps can be disabled using

"Keys touch sound" in the administrator setting.

(See page 10 of the administrator settings guide.)

■ Selecting a function

[Example 1]

If a key is highlighted in a

setting screen at the

time the screen appears,

the [OK] key can be

pressed to store the

selection without further

operation.

[Example 2]

A function in the special

functions screen is

selected by touching the

key so that it is

highlighted. To cancel

the selection, touch the

highlighted key once

again.

[Example 3]

A corresponding icon

representing the feature

will appear on the touch

panel and on the main

screen of the mode

selected. If this icon is

touched, the setting

screen of the function (or

a menu screen) will

appear, allowing the settings to be checked or

adjusted and the function to be canceled easily.

JOB QUEUE

COPY

Suzuki

0666211221

003 / 000

010 / 000

SETS / PROG

Beep

tone

1/13

COMPLETE

Copier feature

● Dual page copy

● Job build

● Tandem copy

● Mirror image

● B/W Reverse

PER.

COVER

SETTING

RIGHT

BINDING

LEFT

BINDING

CANCEL OK

DUAL PAGE

COPY

TANDEM

COPY

8 x14

11x17

8 x11

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

QUICK FILE

FILE

Copy_SEC.book 14 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-15

■ Job status screen (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax)

This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.

This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the

"COMPLETE" job list (showing finished jobs). This screen can be used to check jobs, interrupt a job in progress

to perform another job, and cancel a job.

(1) Job list

The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves

operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job

the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key

to select the job and execute the desired operation

using the keys described in (8) and (9).

This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to

be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the

queue show the job mode. The document filing

reprint job icon is highlighted.

Note that the icon does not become highlighted during

retransmission of a fax/image transmission job.

*1 "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display

When a job status display indicates "PAPER

EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not

loaded in any of the trays.

In this case, the job will be suspended until the

required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be

printed (if possible) until the required paper is loaded.

(Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out

during printing.) If you need to change the paper size

because the specified paper size is not available,

touch the current job key to select it and then touch

the [DETAIL] key described in (10).

(2) Mode select key

This switches the job list display between "JOB

QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".

"JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in

progress.

"COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs.

Files saved using the "FILE"*

and "QUICK

FILE"*

functions and finished broadcast

transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished

job screen. The "FILE"*

or "QUICK FILE"*

job

keys in the finished job screen can be touched,

followed by the [CALL] key*

, to call up a finished

job and print or transmit it. A finished broadcast

transmission job key can be touched followed by

the [DETAIL] key to check the result of the

transmission.

*2 Can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N

or when the document filing function has been

added.

JOB QUEUE

COPY

Suzuki

066211221

STATUS

020 / 001

020 / 000

002 / 000

PRINT JOB

SCAN TO

FAX JOB

INTERNET-FAX

JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE

JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE

DETAIL

PRIORITY

STOP/DELETE

DETAIL

CALL

PAPER EMPTY

WAITING

1/1

SETS / PROGRESS

COPYING

"JOB QUEUE" screen

"COMPLETE"

job screen

(1)

(2)

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)(10) (11)

Print mode Copy mode

Scan to e-mail job

Scan to FTP job

Scan to Desktop job

Scan to Network folder job

Fax send job Fax reception job

PC-Fax send job

i-Fax send job

i-Fax reception job

PC-Internet Fax send job

Internet Fax mode

SCAN mode

Fax mode

Copy_SEC.book 15 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

1-16

(3) [PRINT JOB] key

This displays the print job list of print mode

(copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax

reception, and self printing).

(4) [SCAN TO] key

This displays the transmission status and finished

jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP,

Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder)

when the network scanner option is installed.

(5) [FAX JOB] key

This displays the transmission/reception status

and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax)

when the fax option is installed.

(6) Display switching keys

Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.

(7) [INTERNET-FAX] key

This displays the transmission/reception status

and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC

Internet fax mode when the Internet fax option is

installed.

(8) [STOP/DELETE] key

Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete

the stored job. Note that printing of received faxes

and received Internet faxes cannot be canceled or

deleted.

(9) [PRIORITY] key

Touch this key after selecting a stored job in this

[JOB QUEUE] list to print the job ahead of the

other jobs.

Note that a job in progress cannot be interrupted if

it is an interrupt copy job or if it is a list print job.

(10)

[DETAIL] key

This shows detailed information on the selected

job.

Files saved using the "FILE"*

and "QUICK

FILE"*

functions and finished broadcast

transmission jobs

appear as keys in the finished

job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen

or the [Filing] key

can be touched, followed by the

[CALL] key

, to call up a finished job and print or

transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job

key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to

check the result of the transmission.

(11)

[CALL] key*

When this key is touched after selecting a job in

the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored

using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the

document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS"

menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint

the finished job. (See "Document filing function"

on page 7-2.)

*2 Can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

Copy_SEC.book 16 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

1-17

TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF

Use the power switch on the front of the machine to turn the power on or off.

Power switch

"OFF" position

"ON" position

CAUTION

Before turning off the main power switch, make sure

that the communication and data indicators are not

blinking on the operation panel. Turning off the main

power switch or unplugging the power cord while the

lights are blinking may damage the hard disk and

cause the data being stored or received to be lost.

NOTES

● Turn both switches off and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm

nearby, or when you are moving the machine.

● If the fax function has been added, always keep the fax power switch turned on. Faxes cannot be received if the

fax power switch is turned off. (Faxes can be received when the main power switch is turned off.)

Copy_SEC.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

1-18

AUDITING MODE

Auditing mode can be enabled to keep track of the number of pages printed and transmitted (scanned) by each account

(up to 500 accounts can be established). The page counts can be viewed and totaled as needed.

<This mode is enabled in the administrator settings separately for the copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,

document filing functions. (Page 7 of the administrator settings guide)>

Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled

The procedure for making copies when auditing mode has been enabled for the copy function is explained below.

When the auditing mode is turned on, the right

message appears on the touch panel.

When the above screen appears, enter your 5-digit account number and then begin the copying procedure.

Enter your account number (5 digits) with

the numeric keys.

As you enter your

account number, the

hyphens (-) change to

asterisks ( ). If you

enter an incorrect digit,

press the [C] (Clear) key

and re-enter the correct

digit.

When a correct account number is entered, the

following message will appear.

If a limit has been set in the administrator settings for

the number of copies that can be made by the

account, the remaining number that can be made is

displayed.

Check the number in the display and touch the

[OK] key.

Follow the appropriate steps to perform

the copy job.

When copying is begun, the following message

will appear.

To perform an interrupt copy job (page 5-44),

touch the [INTERRUPT] key and then enter your

account number as explained in step 1. The

following message will appear.

When the copy job is finished, press the

[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)

NOTES

●

When auditing mode is enabled for document filing and fax/image transmission, a message will appear asking you

to enter your account number each time you switch to the main screen of one of those functions in the touch panel.

Enter your account number in the same way as for copy mode, and then begin the scanning procedure.

●

When the a

ccount counter is turned on for the printer function, you must enter your account number in the setting screen

of the printer driver on your computer in order to print.

ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.

NOTE

If "ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY" is enabled in

the administrator settings and an incorrect account

number is entered three times in a row, "PLEASE

SEE YOUR KEY OPERATOR FOR ASSISTANCE."

will appear. (Page 8 of the administrator settings

guide.)

Operation is not possible while this message

appears (about one minute).

LOGOUT

ACCOUNT STATUS :MADE /REMAINING

COPIES :00,123,000/00,012,456

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

PRESS [LOGOUT] WHEN FINISHED.

COPY INTERRUPT MODE.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

LOGOUT

Copy_SEC.book 18 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

2-1

CHAPTER 2

MANAGING THE MACHINE

This chapter explains how to load paper, replace the toner cartridge, and

remove paper misfeeds. It also contains information about supplies.

Page

LOADING PAPER ................................................................................... 2-2

●

Loading paper in paper tray 1 ......................................................... 2-2

●

Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 ......................................... 2-2

●

Specifications of paper trays ........................................................... 2-3

●

Setting the paper type and paper size ............................................ 2-5

●

Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded...................... 2-6

●

Programming and editing paper types ............................................ 2-7

●

Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer..................................... 2-8

●

Specifications (multi purpose drawer)............................................. 2-10

●

Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................. 2-10

●

Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer)......................... 2-10

●

Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer ........ 2-11

●

Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer)................. 2-11

SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 2-12

●

General procedure for system settings ........................................... 2-12

●

About the settings ........................................................................... 2-14

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE................................................ 2-15

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...................................................................... 2-16

MISFEED REMOVAL.............................................................................. 2-17

●

Misfeed removal guidance .............................................................. 2-17

●

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area................ 2-18

●

Misfeed in the duplex module.......................................................... 2-19

●

Misfeed in the paper feed area........................................................ 2-20

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED ................................................... 2-22

●

Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder .. 2-22

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 2-23

02-1.fm 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

2-2

LOADING PAPER

If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display.

Follow the procedure below to load paper.

Loading paper in paper tray 1

Pull out paper tray 1.

Gently pull the tray out

until it stops.

Load paper into the tray.

Do not load paper above

the maximum height line

(approximately 500

sheets of 20 lbs. (80

g/m

) paper).

Gently push tray 1 into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

Set the paper type.

If you change the paper type setting if the paper

type is changed in either paper tray, refer to

"Setting the paper type and paper size" (page

2-5).

Loading paper in paper tray 1 is now

complete.

Changing the paper size in paper tray 1

For paper tray 1, 8-1/2" x 11", A4 or B5 size paper can be set. Use the following procedure to change the size as

needed.

Pull out paper tray 1.

If paper remains in the tray, remove it.

Adjust the guide plates A and B in the tray

to the length and width of the paper.

The guide plates A and

B are slidable. Adjust

them to the paper size to

be loaded while

squeezing their lock

levers.

Load paper into the tray.

Gently push tray 1 into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.

Set the paper size.

Be sure to set the paper size and paper type

referring to "Setting the paper type and paper size"

(page

2-5).

If this is not done, paper misfeeds will occur.

Changing paper size in paper tray 1 is now

complete.

NOTES

● Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed.

● For best results use paper supplied by SHARP. (See page 2-4.)

● When you change the paper type and size in paper tray 1, set the paper type and size referring to "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (page

2-5).

● Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out.

● Load paper with the print side face up. However, when the paper type is set to "PRE-PRINTED",

"PRE-PUNCHED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the paper face down*.

* If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11

of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up.

02-1.fm 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-3

Specifications of paper trays

The specifications for types and sizes of paper that can be used in each tray are shown below.

Tray Tray No.

(tray name)

Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Paper

weight

Paper tray 1 Tray 1 Plain paper (Refer to the next page

for applicable plain papers.)

●

8-1/2

x 11

, A4, B5

16 to 28 lbs. or

60 to 105

Multi purpose

drawer

/bypass tray

Tray 2

/bypass

tray

Plain paper (Refer to the next page

for applicable plain papers.)

●

If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page

2-5

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R

● If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page 2-5),

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2 x 13"

●

Non-standard sizes

16 to 34 lbs. or

60 to 128

Special paper

(Refer to the

next page for

applicable

special

papers.)

●

Thick paper

●

Labels,

transparency film

●

If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page

2-5

), the

following paper sizes can be used with the

automatic detection function:

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R

●

If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page

2-5

), the

following paper sizes can be used with the

automatic detection function:

A4, A4R, B5, B5R

●

Non-standard sizes

See the

remarks for

special

paper on the

next page.

Postcard ●

Japanese official postcard

Envelopes can only

be fed from the

multi-purpose drawer.

Applicable stock

weight for envelopes

is 20 to 23 lbs. or 75

to 90 g/m

●

Applicable standard size envelopes:

COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5

CHOKEI 3

●

Non-standard size

Stand

/3 x500 sheet

paper drawer

Upper Tray 2 Same as multi purpose drawer

Middle Tray 3 Plain paper (Refer to the next page

for applicable plain papers.)

●

If "AUTO-INCH" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page

2-5

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"

● If "AUTO-AB" is selected in setting the

paper type and paper size (page 2-5),

the following paper sizes can be used

with the automatic detection function:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"

16 to 28 lbs. or

60 to 105

Lower Tray 4

Stand

/MPD & 2000

sheet paper

drawer

Upper Tray 2 Same as multi purpose drawer

Lower Tray 3 Plain paper (Refer to the next page

for applicable plain papers.)

●

8-1/2" x 11", A4

16 to 28 lbs.

or 60 to

105

02-1.fm 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-4

■ Applicable plain paper

For satisfactory results, plain paper must conform to the following requirements.

■ Applicable special paper

For satisfactory results, special paper must conform to the following requirements.

■ Paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing

Paper used for automatic two-sided printing (paper that can be fed through the duplex module) must meet the

following conditions:

Paper type :Plain paper as specified above.

Paper size :Must be one of the following standard sizes: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"

x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5R)

Paper weight :16 to 28 lbs. (64 to 105

g/m

)

Paper in AB system Paper in inch system

A5 to A3 5-1/2

x 8-1/2

to 11

x17

Plain paper 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m

Recycled, colored, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above.

Type Rema rk s

Special paper Thick paper ●

For 5-1/2

x 8-1/2

to 8-1/2

x 11

or A5 to A4 sizes, thick paper ranging

from 16 to 34 lbs. or 60 to 128

can be used.

●

For sizes larger than 8-1/2

x 11

or A4, thick paper ranging from 16 to 28

lbs. or 60 to 105

can be used.

●

Other thick papers Index stock (65 lbs. or 176

) can be used.

Cover stock (110 lbs. or 200 to 205

) can be used but only for 8-1/2

x 11, A4 paper in the portrait orientation.

●

For 5-1/2

x 8-1/2

or A5 paper, the orientation must be landscape.

Transparency film, labels,

and tracing paper

●

Use SHARP recommended paper. Do not use labels other than SHARP

recommended labels. Doing so may leave adhesive residue in the

machine, causing paper misfeeds, smudges on prints or other machine

trouble.

Postcards ●

Japanese official postcards can be used.

Envelopes ●

Applicable standard envelopes: COM-10, Monarch, DL, C5, ISO B5,

CHOKEI 3

● Envelopes can only be fed from the tray 2.

Applicable paper stock weight for envelopes is 20 to 23 lbs. or 75 to 90

NOTES

● Special papers (explained above) cannot be used for automatic two-sided printing.

● Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold. Some of these cannot be used in the machine. Please

consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper.

● The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions, operating

conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper.

02-1.fm 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-5

Setting the paper type and paper size

Follow these steps to change the paper type setting if the paper type is changed in either paper tray. For the paper

types that can be used in each tray, see page 2-3.

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The system setting

menu screen will

appear.

Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

The paper tray selection

screen will appear.

Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.

Display the setting screen of the desired

paper tray.

Touch the key or key to display the

setting screen of the desired paper tray.

Touch the [TYPE / SIZE] key.

Select the type of paper that was loaded in

the tray.

Example: The paper type of tray 2 is selected

Touch the desired paper type to select it. The

paper size setting screen will appear.

■ User type

Set a user type when a paper type is not available

as an option. To select a user type, touch the

key in the screen of step 6 to display the user type

selection screen. To store or edit a user type name

or set tray attributes, see "Programming and

editing paper types" on page 2-7.

NOTE

To automatically switch to a tray with the same size

and type of paper (if there is one) in the event that the

paper tray runs out of paper, display the last screen

with the key and select [AUTO TRAY

SWITCHING].

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

ATA

ORWARD

RINT

PRINTER

CONDITION

TRAY SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

1/8

PLAIN / 8 x11

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

SYSTEM SETTINGS

TRAY 1

FAX

I-FAX

COPY

DOC.

FILING

FIXED PAPER SIDE

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

NOTE

Heavy paper, label sheets and transparency film

cannot be used in trays 1, 3, and 4. Envelopes can

only be placed in tray 2.

TYPE / SIZE

TRAY 2

PER TRAY SETTINGS

COPY

I-FAX

DOC.

FILING

FAX

PLAIN / 8 x11

CANCEL

1/2

PLAIN

RECYCLED

PRE-PRINTED PRE-PUNCHED

LETTER HEAD

COLOR

HEAVY PAPER

TAB PAPER

LABELS

TRANSPARENCY

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

1/2

CUSTOM SETTINGS

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

2/2

USER TYPE 1

USER TYPE 5 USER TYPE 6 USER TYPE 7

USER TYPE 2 USER TYPE 3 USER TYPE 4

CANCEL

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE

1/2

02-1.fm 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-6

Select the size of paper that was loaded in

the tray.

Touch the appropriate keys (checkboxes).

Touch the [OK] key in the size setting

screen.

You will return to the tray setting screen of step 4.

Select output functions that can be used

with the selected tray.

Touch the checkboxes

under the desired items

to select them.

Checkboxes that can be

selected will vary

depending on the options

that are installed.

Configure paper settings for each tray and

then touch the [OK] key to exit.

Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded

Tray 2 and the bypass tray

Perform steps 1 through 6 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (see page 2-5).

Touch the [SIZE INPUT] key and then

touch the [INCH] tab.

The size entry palette

appears.

Touch the key or the key to enter

the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of

the paper.

Entry of the X dimension

(width) is initially

selected. Touch the [Y]

key and enter the Y

dimension (length) in the

same way as the X

dimension.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the size

setting screen of step 2.

If the paper is a non-standard size, select

the [NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox.

Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the

paper type and paper size" (See above).

[AUTO-INCH] key :

Select when you have loaded

an inch-based size of paper.

[AUTO-AB] key : Select when you have

loaded an AB size of paper.

[SIZE INPUT] key : Select to directly enter a

paper size (see below).

[NON STANDARD

SIZE] checkbox

: Select when you have

loaded a non-standard size

of paper (see below).

[POST] key : Select this when you have

loaded postcards.

NOTE

Sizes that can be selected vary depending on the

selected paper type.

11X17,8 X14,8 X11

8 X11R,7 X10 ,5 X8 R

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5

B5R,216X330(8 X13)

TYPE

PLAIN

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

SYSTEM SETTINGS

TYPE

AUTO-INCH

SIZE INPUT

AUTO-AB

SIZE

X17 Y11

NON STANDARD

SIZE

2/2

NOTE

The type and size of paper loaded in the bypass tray

can also be set from the paper selection screen.

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key at the top of the

base screen to display the paper selection screen,

touch the [PAPER SELECT] key for the bypass tray,

and then go to step 6.

COPY

FAX

I-FAX

DOC.

FILING

NOTE

Special sizes of paper cannot be loaded in trays 1, 3 and 4.

(5 1/2 17)

inch

INCH

(5 1/2 11 5/8)

inch

INCH

(5 1/2 17)

inch

(5 1/2 11 5/8)

inch

INCH

(5 1/2 17)

inch

(5 1/2 11 5/8)

inch

NON STANDARD

SIZE

17,8

14,8

11R,7

10 ,5

8 R

A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5

B5R,216x330(8 x13)

X17 Y11

02-1.fm 6 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時２４分

LOADING PAPER

2-7

Programming and editing paper types

To program or edit the name of a paper type or set paper attributes, follow the steps below.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the paper

type and paper size" (page 2-5)

Touch the [PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION]

key.

Select the paper type that you wish to

program or edit.

Touch the [TYPE NAME] key.

A character entry screen

appears.

Enter a type name

(maximum of 14

characters). (See page

7-29 to enter characters.)

Set the attributes of the paper tray.

Touch the checkboxes to

the left of the items to

select them.

Touch the [EXIT] key to exit the

programming/editing procedure.

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

SYSTEM SETTINGS

TRAY 2 TYPE/SIZE SETTING

USER TYPE 1

SELECT THE PAPER TYPE

USER TYPE 5

USER TYPE 2

USER TYPE 6

USER

FIXED PAPER SIDE

TYPE NAME

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

No.01

USER TYPE 1

DISABLE STAPLE

DISAB

FIXED PAPER SIDE

TYPE NAME

PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION

No.01

USER TYPE 1

DISABLE STAPLE

DISAB

"FIXED PAPER SIDE"

: Select when paper is to be

loaded print side down in the

tray. Make sure a checkmark

does not appear when paper is

to be loaded print side up.

• If the two-sided function is

prohibited in "DISABLING OF

DUPLEX" in the administrator

settings (page 11 of the

administrator settings guide), do

not use this setting.

"DISABLE DUPLEX"

: Prohibits two-sided printing.

Enable when the back side of

the paper cannot be printed

on.

"DISABLE STAPLE" :

Prohibits stapling. Enable

when using special papers

such as transparency film and

label sheets.

"DISABLE PUNCH" : Prohibits punching. Enable

when using special papers

such as transparency film and

label sheets.

NOTE

"FIXED PAPER SIDE" and "DISABLE DUPLEX"

cannot be simultaneously enabled.

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE PUNCH

EXITCANCEL

02-1.fm 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-8

Loading paper in the multi purpose drawer

The method of loading paper into the multipurpose drawer is the same as for paper tray 1 described on page 2-2.

For specifications of paper, see page 2-3. When loading envelopes, postcards or transparency film, follow the

descriptions below.

● Two maximum height lines are indicated: one for plain paper and one for special paper.

■ How to change the paper size

To change the paper size or paper type when paper is loaded into the multi purpose drawer, refer to page 2-5 for

details.

■ Setting envelopes or postcards

When setting envelopes or postcards in the multi purpose drawer, set them in the orientation shown below.

Loading postcards

Load postcards print side up to the rear left of the tray

as shown.

Loading envelopes

Envelopes can only be printed on the address side. Be

sure to place envelopes with the address side up and

the top of the envelope to the rear.

Printing onto envelopes or postcards

● Attempting to print onto both sides of envelopes or postcards may result in misfeeds or poor prints.

● Do not use paper that has already been printed on by a thermal transfer or inkjet printer. In particular, paper

that has been printed on by a thermal transfer printer (such as a word processor that uses a cassette) may

cause missing characters and smudges.

● To avoid wrinkling, misfeeds or poor printing, make sure the postcard or envelopes stock is not curled.

Maximum height line for plain paper

Do not exceed this line when loading plain paper.

Maximum height line special paper (red line)

Do not exceed this line when loading special paper.

02-1.fm 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-9

Printing onto envelopes

● Do not use envelopes that have metal clasps, plastic snaps, string closures, windows, linings, self-adhesive

patches or synthetic materials. Attempting to print on these may cause misfeeds, inadequate toner adherence or

other trouble.

● Creases or smudging may occur. This is especially true of embossed surfaces and other irregular surfaces.

● Under high humidity and temperature conditions the glue flaps on some envelopes may become sticky and be

sealed closed when printed.

● Use only envelopes which are flat and crisply folded. Curled or poorly formed envelopes may be poorly printed or

may cause misfeeds.

Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers

When feeding envelopes from the multi purpose drawer, damage to the envelopes or smudges on prints may occur

even if envelopes within specification are used. In this case, the problem may be reduced by shifting the fusing unit

pressure adjusting levers from the normal position to the lower pressure position. Follow the procedure below.

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

Lower the two fusing unit pressure

adjusting levers marked A and B in the

illustration.

Gently close the duplex module.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

NOTE

Be sure to return the lever to the normal position when finished feeding envelopes. If not, inadequate toner

adherence, paper misfeeds or other trouble may occur.

Normal position

Lower pressure position

A: Rear side of

fusing unit

B: Front side of

fusing unit

02-1.fm 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-10

■ Loading transparency film

Be sure to load the transparency film with the white label side up. Make sure no image will be printed on the label.

Printing on the label may cause smudges on prints. Transparency film must be set in the portrait orientation.

Specifications (multi purpose drawer)

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Loading paper in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer

Upper paper tray:

The upper tray is the same as the multi-purpose drawer. Use the upper tray according to the instructions for the

multi-purpose drawer on page 2-8.

Middle and lower paper trays:

Up to 500 sheets of SHARP recommended plain paper can be loaded in these trays. The method of loading paper

is the same as for paper tray 1 in the main unit. See the description (page 2-2).

Specifications (stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer)

Name Multi purpose drawer

Paper size/weight See specifications of paper trays on page 2-3.

Paper capacity

500 sheets (20 lbs. (80

g/m

)) of paper, 40 envelopes, 40 postcards, 40 sheets

of transparency film

Dimensions

25-3/4" (W) x 22-21/64" (D) x 5-43/64" (H)

(654 mm (W) x 567 mm (D) x 144 mm (H))

Weight Approximately 24.3 lbs. or 11 kg

NOTE

If the paper size or paper type is changed in either paper tray, the tray settings must be changed in system settings.

Refer to "

Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5.

Name Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer

Paper size/weight See specifications of paper trays on page 2-3.

Paper capacity

(ordinary paper)

500 sheets (20 lbs. (80

g/m

)) each

Dimensions

23-3/16" (W) x 24-51/64" (D) x 15-29/32" (H)

(589 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 404 mm (H))

Weight Approximately 70.6 lbs. or 32.9 kg

02-1.fm 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

LOADING PAPER

2-11

Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer

Upper paper tray:

The upper paper tray is equivalent to the multi purpose drawer. The method of loading paper and the paper that can

be used are the same as for the multi purpose drawer. Refer to the description of the multi purpose drawer (see page

2-8).

Lower paper tray:

The lower paper tray is a large capacity tray that holds 2,000 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper (20 lbs. (80 g/m

)).

Use the following procedure to load paper in the large capacity tray.

Pull out the large capacity tray.

Gently pull the tray out

until it stops.

Load paper onto the right and left paper

feed tables.

Load paper onto the

right paper feed table.

The right table holds

approximately 1,200

sheets.

Raise the paper guide

and load paper onto the

left paper feed table.

The left table holds

approximately 800

sheets. After loading

paper, be sure to return

the paper guide.

Gently push the large capacity paper tray

into the machine.

Push the tray firmly all

the way into the

machine.

Set the paper type.

If you have changed the paper size from the AB

system to the inch system or vice versa, select the

relevant type referring to "Setting the paper type

and paper size" on page 2-5.

Loading paper in the stand/MPD & 2000

sheet paper drawer is now complete.

Specifications (stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer)

NOTE

If the paper size or paper type is changed in either paper tray, the tray settings must be changed in system settings.

Refer to "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5.

Name Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer

Paper size/weight See specifications of paper trays on page 2-3.

Paper capacity

(ordinary paper)

Upper tray: 500 sheets (20 lbs. (80 g/m

)), Lower tray: 2,000 sheets (20 lbs. (80

g/m

))

Dimensions

23-3/16" (W) x 24-51/64" (D) x 15-29/32" (H)

(589 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 404 mm (H))

Weight Approximately 75 lbs. or 34 kg

02-1.fm 11 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後４時３分

2-12

SYSTEM SETTINGS

The system settings can be used as needed to meet the needs of your workplace. The items that can be set with the

system settings are shown below.

● Total count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment

can be displayed. (See page 2-14)

● Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to configure the screen contrast, date and time, and keyboard

selection*

settings. (See page 2-14)

● List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to print lists of settings and fonts. (See page 2-14)

● Paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . . The paper type, paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each

tray. Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded

with the same type and size of paper. If one tray runs out of paper during

printing, printing will continue from the other tray. (See page 2-14)

For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below, see the fax, image send, and printer

manuals.

● Address control*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to store information for various functions.

● Sender control*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to store the sender's information that appears on your Scan to E-mail

transmissions at the destination.

●

Fax data receive/forward

. . . . . .Faxes received to memory and received Internet faxes can be forwarded to

another destination.

● Printer condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the printer function (see the Operation

manual (for printer)).

●

Document filing control

. . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the document filing function. (pages 7-24

to 7-28)

● Administrator settings . . . . . . . . . These are items that are used by the administrator of the machine to

configure machine settings. A key appears for these settings in the system

settings menu screen. For information on these settings, see the

administrator settings guide.

1 These settings can be configured in a system where the facsimile, network scanner or Internet fax function is

available.

2 These settings can be configured in a system where the network scanner function is available.

3 These settings can be configured in a system where the document filing function is available.

General procedure for system settings

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The system settings

menu screen will

appear.

Touch the key of the desired item to

display its setting screen.

The example of selecting the [DEFAULT SETTINGS]

key and then the [CLOCK] key is explained below.

The system settings are described in detail on the

following pages.

Touch the [CLOCK] key.

Touch the [CLOCK] key and then the following

screen appears.

Touch the year, month, day, hour or minute

key, and then use the or key to

adjust the setting.

●If you select a non-existent date (for example,

Feb. 30), the [OK] key will gray out to prevent

entry of the date.

●Select [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING]

checkbox to have the time automatically

change at the beginning and end of daylight

saving time.

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

LIST PRINT

FAX DATA

RECEIVE/FORWARD

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PRINTER

CONDITION

EXIT

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

ADDRESS CONTROL

TOTAL COUNT

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

SYSTEM SETTINGS

CLOCK ADJUST

DATE FORMAT

YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE

2010 04 04 11 30

DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING

Copy_SEC.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SYSTEM SETTINGS

2-13

Touch the [DATE FORMAT] key.

The following screen appears.

If you wish to change the format of the date

and time, touch the desired format keys.

Touched keys are highlighted.

The selected format is applied to lists printed out in

"LIST PRINT".

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

date and time setting

screen.

Touch the [OK] key.

To exit the settings, touch the [EXIT] key.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

DATE FORMAT

YYYY/MM/DD

MM/DD/YYYY

DAY-NAME

POSITION

FIRST 12-HOUR

24-HOUR

LAST

2010/04/04/SUN 11:30

DD/MM/YYYY

AME

T 12-HOUR

SYSTEM SETTINGS

LIST PRINT

FAX DATA

RECEIVE/FORWARD

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

EXIT

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

ADDRESS CONTROL

TOTAL COUNT

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

PRINTER

CONDITION

More information on setting procedures

In the following type of screen, a setting is selected

by touching the key so that a checkmark ( )

appears. The settings below are configured to

allow use of tray 1 in print, copy, and fax modes. To

display the next screen, touch the or keys.

FAXCOPYPRINT

TRAY1

TYPE / SIZE

SYSTEM SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

PLAIN / 8 X11

FIXED PAPER SIDE

1/8

DOC.

FILING

I-FAX

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

Copy_SEC.book 13 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SYSTEM SETTINGS

2-14

About the settings

■ Total count

This displays the following sheet counts (the

counts that can be displayed vary depending on

the options installed):

(1) Number of pages output by the machine.

(2) Number of original pages transmitted by the

machine.

(3) Number of times the automatic document

feeder was used to feed original pages and

number of times the stapler was used (if

installed).

(4) Number of pages stored by document filing.

In the case of (1) only,

●11" x 17" (A3) size paper is counted as two

sheets.

●Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-

sided copying is counted as two sheets (11" x

17" (A3) paper is counted as four sheets).

●Paper with an entered size of 15-1/8" (384 mm)

or larger is counted as two sheets (four sheets

during automatic two-sided copying).

■ Default settings

The following settings can be configured:

●Display contrast

Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the

LCD touch panel easier to view under various

lighting conditions. Touch the [LIGHTER] key to

make the screen lighter, or the [DARKER] key to

make the screen darker.

●Clock

Use this to set the date and time in the

machine's built-in clock. This clock is used by

functions that require date and time information.

●Keyboard select

The layout of the keyboard that appears in letter

entry screens can be changed.

Select the arrangement of the letter keys that

you find easiest to use.

The following three alphabet keyboard

configurations are available:

● Keyboard 1 (QWERT... configuration)*

● Keyboard 2 (AZERTY...configuration)

● Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF...configuration)

* The default setting is "Keyboard 1".

(Example: Character entry screen when

Keyboard 3 is selected)

■ List print

This is used to print lists of machine settings and a

test page to check resident fonts.

The following lists and pages are available:

●All custom setting list

Shows the hardware status, software status,

printer configuration settings, tray settings, and

counts.

●Printer test page

Shows the PCL symbol set list, fonts, network

interface (NIC interface) settings, and settings

used for the NIC card.

●Sending address list

One touch destination list, group list, program

list, and memory box list.

●Document filing user / folder list

Shows the user names and folder names for

document filing.

●Sender control list

Shows the senders that have been stored.

■ Paper tray settings

The paper type, paper size, enabled modes and

automatic tray switching can be set for each tray.

See page 2-5 to 2-7 for details on setting the paper

type and paper size. Automatic switching to

another paper tray is used to automatically switch

to another tray with the same size and type of

paper in the event that the paper runs out during

continuous printing. This requires that the trays be

loaded with the same size of paper. The paper tray

settings can be enabled or disabled for each tray,

and for printer mode, copy mode, fax mode,

Internet fax mode, and document filing mode. To

enable any function, touch the check box key so

that a checkmark

()

appears.

ABC abc

NOTE

A test page cannot be printed if "PROHIBIT TEST

PAGE PRINTING" (See the "Operation manual (for

printer)".) has been set to "prohibited" in the

administrator settings.

Copy_SEC.book 14 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

2-15

REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE

When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced.

Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge.

Open the front cover.

Lower the cartridge lock lever.

While depressing the lock release button,

pull out the toner cartridge and remove it.

Remove a new toner cartridge from the

package and shake it horizontally five or

six times.

Insert a new toner cartridge.

Push the cartridge in

until it locks securely into

place.

Gently remove the sealing tape from the

cartridge.

Once the seal is pulled

out, the toner in the toner

cartridge is supplied to

the developer cartridge.

Return the cartridge lock lever.

Close the front cover.

NOTE

To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, hold down the [COPY] key during printing or when the

machine is on standby. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while you hold down the key.

When the percentage falls to "25-0%" , obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.

NOTE

Shake the toner

cartridge well to

ensure that the toner

flows well and will not

stick to the inside of

the cartridge.

CAUTION

● Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.

● Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.

NOTE

Place the used toner cartridge in the plastic bag and store it. When placing the toner cartridge in the bag, insert

it horizontally, not vertically. If the cartridge is stood on end, the collected used toner may spill out and soil the floor

or your clothes.

Copy_SEC.book 15 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

2-16

STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridges, and staple cartridges

for the finisher.

■ Proper storage

1. Store the supplies in a location that is:

● clean and dry,

● at a stable temperature,

● not exposed to direct sunlight.

2. Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.

3. Paper stored in packages standing up or out of

the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting

in paper misfeeds.

4. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally. Do

not store it standing on end. If stored standing on

end, the toner may not distribute well even after

shaking the cartridge vigorously, and will remain

inside the cartridge without flowing out.

For best copying results, be sure to use only Sharp Genuine Supplies which are designed,

engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Sharp products. Look for

the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package.

GENUINE SUPPLIES

Supply and Consumables

The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination

of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary

use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered

as spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production.

Copy_SEC.book 16 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

2-17

MISFEED REMOVAL

When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message "A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED". will appear in the touch

panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The approximate

misfeed locations are indicated with " " shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed information

on misfeed removal are also shown.

Misfeed removal guidance

Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a misfeed

has occurred.

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing

area, and exit area (page 2-18)

Misfeed in the mail-bin

stacker (page 3-6)

Misfeed in paper tray 1 (page 2-20)

Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer

(page 2-21)

Misfeed in the stand/MPD & 2000

sheet paper drawer (page 2-21)

Misfeed in the stand/3 x 500 sheet

paper drawer (page 2-21)

Misfeed in the document feeder (page 2-22)

Misfeed in the finisher (page 3-12)

Misfeed in the duplex module

(page 2-19)

Misfeed in the bypass tray (page 2-19)

Misfeed in the saddle

stitch finisher (page

3-22)

Misfeed in the

multi purpose

drawer (page

2-21)

NOTE

Printing is not possible when a misfeed occurs, and thus any faxes or Internet faxes received at this time will be

temporarily held in memory. The faxes will print out automatically as soon as the misfeed is cleared.

NOTES

● Do not damage or touch the photoconductive

drum. (See page 2-18.)

● Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during

removal.

● lf paper is accidentally torn during removal, be

sure to remove all pieces.

Fusing unit

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take

care in removing paper.

INFORMATION

Copy_SEC.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-18

Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

Remove the misfed paper as shown in the

illustrations below.

If paper is misfed in the

transport area, turn

roller rotating knob A in

the direction of the arrow

to remove the misfed

paper.

If paper is misfed in the

fusing area, turn roller

rotating knob B in the

direction of the arrow to

remove the misfed

paper.

If the misfed paper is

inside the fusing area,

turn down the fusing unit

open tab to open the

fusing unit and remove

the misfed paper.

If paper is misfed in the

exit area, remove it as

shown while taking care

not to tear the paper.

If the duplex module is

equipped with an exit

tray and paper is misfed

in the exit area, remove

the misfed paper as

shown in the illustration.

Gently close the duplex module.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

After closing, confirm

that the misfeed

message is cleared and

the normal display

appears.

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.

(Do not touch the metal parts.)

NOTE

Do not touch or

damage the transfer

roller.

Do not touch or

damage the

photoconductive

drum.

Roller rotating knob A

Transfer roller

Photoconductive drum

CAUTION

The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.

(Do not touch any metal parts.)

Roller rotating knob B

Fusing unit open tab

02-2.fm 18 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時３３分

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-19

Misfeed in the duplex module

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the unit and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the duplex module has an exit tray, rotate

it up out of the way and open the cover of

the duplex module.

If no exit tray is attached,

just open the cover of the

duplex module and

ignore any reference to

the tray in the following

steps.

While holding the exit tray up, remove the

misfed paper as shown in the illustrations

below.

If paper is misfed at the

upper part of the duplex

module, gently remove it

while taking care not to

tear the paper.

If paper is misfed at the

lower part of the duplex

module, gently remove it

while taking care not to

tear the paper.

Close the cover of the duplex module and

lower the exit tray.

Gently close the duplex module.

After closing the duplex

module, confirm that the

misfeed message is

cleared and the normal

display appears.

■ Misfeed in the bypass tray

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the unit and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

Remove the misfed from the bypass tray.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Gently close the duplex module.

After closing the duplex

module, confirm that the

misfeed message is

cleared and that the

normal display appears.

Copy_SEC.book 19 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-20

Misfeed in the paper feed area

■ Misfeed in paper tray 1

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

If misfed paper is not found in step 2, pull

out paper tray 1 and remove the misfed

paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Gently close the paper tray.

Push the paper tray back

into the machine.

Gently close the duplex module.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

After closing, confirm

that the misfeed

message is cleared and

the normal display

appears.

NOTE

Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the tray out immediately as the misfeed may have

occurred with paper partially fed out of the tray. Open the left cover and see if there is misfed paper first (steps 1

and 2). If you open the tray without checking, the partially fed paper may tear and leave torn pieces in the machine,

increasing the difficulty of removal.

NOTE

The paper may not be extending out far from inside

the machine but must be removed if it is possible to

grasp it. If it is not possible to grasp it, go to the next

step.

NOTE

If paper drops beyond the rear side of the paper tray

that has been pulled out, remove the paper tray and

then remove the paper. (For removal of the paper

tray, see the illustration below.)

After pulling out the

paper tray until it

stops, gently lift and

pull the tray to remove

it. To reinstall the

paper tray, insert it at

an angle and then

push it into the

machine.

To remove a paper tray from a stand/paper drawer,

pull the tray out until it stops then rotate it to the left

to disengage it from the stand. When reinstalling it,

place the left rear or the drawer into the slot and

rotate the drawer to the right and into the stand.

Installation of trays in the stand/3x500 sheet

paper drawer

The middle and lower trays cannot be installed in the

upper tray position and the upper tray cannot be

installed to the middle and lower tray positions.

(These cannot be pushed into the machine.)

Take care not to install a tray to an improper position

after removing the tray.

Copy_SEC.book 20 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MISFEED REMOVAL

2-21

■ Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer

Unlatch the duplex module and slide it to

the left.

Unlatch the module and

gently move the module

away from the machine.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, open the side

cover similarly.

Open the left cover of the stand/paper

drawer.

Hold the knob and gently

open the cover.

If the machine is not

equipped with a stand/

paper drawer, open the

left cover of the multi

purpose drawer.

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the left cover of the stand/paper

drawer.

Gently close the duplex unit.

If the machine is not

equipped with a duplex

module, close the side

cover.

After closing, confirm that

the misfeed message has

been cleared and the

normal display appears.

If misfed paper is not found in step 3, refer to

"Misfeed in paper tray 1" (steps 1 to 5 on the

previous page) to remove the misfed paper.

■ Misfeed in the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper

drawer

For misfeed removal in the upper tray, follow the

procedure of "Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer"

shown to the left to remove the misfed paper.

■ Misfeed in the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer

For misfeed removal in the upper tray, follow the

procedure of "Misfeed in the multi purpose drawer"

shown to the left to remove the misfed paper. For

misfeed removal in the lower large capacity tray,

follow the procedure below.

Follow steps 1 to 4 of "Misfeed in the multi

purpose drawer" shown to the left.

If misfed paper is not found in step 1, refer

to "Misfeed in paper tray 1" on the

previous page.

If misfed paper is not found in steps 1 and

2, pull out the large capacity tray (lower

tray) and remove the misfed paper as

shown in the illustrations below.

Raise the paper guide and

remove the misfed paper.

After removing the

misfed paper, be sure to

return the paper guide.

Gently close the large capacity tray.

Push the paper tray all

the way into the

machine.

Gently close the duplex module.

If the machine is not equipped with a duplex

module, close the side cover.

After closing, confirm that the misfeed message

has been cleared and the normal display appears.

NOTE

The paper may not be extending out far from inside

the machine but must be removed if it is possible to

grasp it. If it is not possible to grasp it, go to the next

step.

Copy_SEC.book 21 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

2-22

REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED

Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder

If an original misfeed occurs in the automatic document feeder, follow the steps below to remove the misfed original.

Check locations A and B in the diagram at left to

remove the original.

Removing misfeeds from each location.

● Check location A

Open the document

feeding area cover and

gently remove the misfed

original without tearing it.

Close the cover securely

so that cover clicks into

place.

● Check location B

● Misfeed in the transfer unit

Open the document

feeder and turn the

green rotating knob in

the direction of the arrow

to remove any misfed

originals.

Open and close the document feeder.

Opening and closing the

cover clears the misfeed

display. Copying cannot

be resumed until this

step is performed.

However, this step is not

necessary after a

misfeed is removed from location B.

A message may appear indicating the number of

originals which must be returned to the document

feeder tray. Return the originals to the document

feeder tray and press the [START] key.

NOTES

● For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see page 2-17

● When a misfeed occurs, touch the [INFORMATION] key to display detailed information for misfeed removal.

Document feeding area

cover

Copy_SEC.book 22 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

2-23

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you

are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the power switch, unplug the power cord.

Problems related to general use of the machine are described below. For problems related to the copy function, see

page 6-3. For problems related to document filing, see page 7-31. For fax, printer, and network scanner/Internet fax

problems, see the manuals for those functions. For peripheral device problems, see the explanation of the device.

If the message "CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:**-**"

(Note)

appears in the touch panel, turn off the power switch, wait

about 10 seconds, and then turn the power switch back on. If the message still appears after turning the power

switch off and on several times, it is likely that a failure has occurred that requires service. In this event, stop using

the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Sharp dealer.

Note: Letters and numbers appear in "**-**". When you contact your Sharp dealer, please tell your dealer what

letters and numbers appear.

Problem Check Solution or cause

The machine does

not operate.

Machine plugged in? Plug the machine into a grounded outlet.

The power switch are not turned on? Turn on the power switch. (Page 1-17)

READY indicator off?

The machine is warming up. (Warm-up time is

approximately 80 seconds.) Wait until the

READY indicator lights up.

Message indicating need to load paper

displayed?

Load paper. (Page 2-2)

Message indicating need to replace the

toner cartridge displayed?

Replace the toner cartridge. (Page 2-15)

Message indicating a paper misfeed

displayed?

Remove misfed paper. (Page 2-17)

Copying/printing is

not possible.

A message appears saying that this type

of paper cannot be used for two-sided

copying.

Two-sided printing is not possible on special

paper. Use paper that can be used for automatic

two-sided printing. (Page 2-4)

Copy_SEC.book 23 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

TROUBLESHOOTING

2-24

Printing stops

before the job is

finished.

If too many pages collect on the output

tray, the tray full sensor activates and

stops printing.

Remove the paper from the output tray.

The paper tray is out of paper. Load paper. (Page 2-2)

Smudges on printed

sheets.

Does a message appear indicating the

need for maintenance?

Please contact your dealer as soon as possible.

The displayed paper

size or paper type

does not match the

loaded paper size or

paper type.

The correct paper size or paper type is

not set in the paper tray settings of the

system settings.

When loading paper, if you change the paper

size from an inch size to an AB size, or from an

AB size to an inch size, or change the paper

type, be sure to set the new paper type as

explained in "Setting the paper type and paper

size" (see page 2-5).

When printing on a

special size of

paper, part of the

printed image is

missing.

The paper size setting is not set

correctly in the paper tray settings of the

system settings.

When using a special size of paper, set the

correct paper size as explained in "Setting the

paper type and paper size" on page

2-5

. If the

paper size setting is not correct, part of the image

may be cut off or the image may not be printed.

Paper misfeeds

frequently.

Is paper other than SHARP-

recommended paper being used?

Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-16

)

Is the paper size or weight outside the

specifications?

Use paper within the specifications.

Paper damp?

Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry

location and do not store paper in a location that is

●humid

●at a high temperature or an extremely low

temperature

●exposed to direct sunlight

●dusty.

The contrast on the

touch panel is too

high or too low.

Is LCD contrast properly adjusted?

Adjust the screen contrast using "DISPLAY

CONTRAST" in "Default settings" of the system

settings. (Page 2-14)

Printing takes place

on the wrong side of

the paper.

The paper is loaded in the tray with the

print side face down*.

* Face up if the paper type is "PRE-

PRINTED", "PRE-PUNCHED" or

"LETTER HEAD".

Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.

However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED",

"PRE-PUNCHED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the

paper with the print side face down*.

* If the two-sided function has been prohibited

using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the

administrator settings (page 11 of the

administrator settings guide), load the paper

face up.

Marks appear at

regular intervals on

printed pages.

Paper with punch holes is being used.

If the original image overlaps the punch holes,

marks will appear at the position of the holes on

the back of the paper after one-sided printing, or

on the front and back of the paper after two-sided

printing. Make sure that the original image does

not overlap the punch holes.

Problem Check Solution or cause

Copy_SEC.book 25 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 26 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-1

CHAPTER 3

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

This chapter describes operating instructions for the Mail-Bin Stacker,

the Finisher, the Saddle Stitch Finisher, and the Duplex Module, as well

as Sharp OSA (application communication module and external

account module).

Page

DUPLEX MODULE ................................................................................. 3-2

●

Part names...................................................................................... 3-2

●

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-2

●

Loading paper in the bypass tray .................................................... 3-3

●

Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module) ........................... 3-4

MAIL-BIN STACKER ............................................................................... 3-5

●

Part names...................................................................................... 3-5

●

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-5

●

Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker........................................................ 3-6

FINISHER ............................................................................................... 3-7

●

Part names...................................................................................... 3-7

●

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-7

●

Finisher functions............................................................................ 3-8

●

Using the finisher functions............................................................. 3-9

●

Staple cartridge replacement.......................................................... 3-10

●

Misfeed in the finisher ..................................................................... 3-12

●

Troubleshooting finisher problems................................................... 3-13

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER.................................................................. 3-14

●

Part names...................................................................................... 3-14

●

Specifications.................................................................................. 3-14

●

Saddle stitch finisher functions........................................................ 3-15

●

Using the saddle stitch finisher ....................................................... 3-18

●

Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal.................... 3-19

●

Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher ................................................ 3-22

●

Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher) .................. 3-24

SHARP OSA ........................................................................................... 3-25

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)..................... 3-25

●

Standard application setup.............................................................. 3-25

●

Selecting a standard application ..................................................... 3-25

●

Operation in OSA mode.................................................................. 3-26

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3) ...................................... 3-27

●

External account application setup ................................................. 3-27

●

Operation in external account mode ............................................... 3-27

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-2

DUPLEX MODULE

If a duplex module is installed, printing onto both sides of paper can be performed.

Two types of duplex modules are available: duplex module/bypass tray and duplex module. The descriptions in this

manual are for the duplex module/bypass tray. For information on misfeed removal for these modules, see page 2-19.

Part names

Specifications

For paper size and paper weight for the bypass tray, see "Specifications of paper trays (types and sizes of

applicable papers for trays)" on page 2-3.

Duplex module/bypass tray only.

When the bypass tray extension is extended.

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

NOTES

● Do not press down on the bypass tray or the exit tray.

● The duplex module requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be

installed together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are

compatible.

Name Duplex module (AR-DU3) or Duplex module/bypass tray (AR-DU4)

Paper size (for duplex copy)*

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2 "x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" R,

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R

Paper weight (for duplex copy)*

16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m

Reference paper position Center

Bypass tray paper capacity*

100 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Dimensions

Duplex module: 4-17/32" (W) x 16-15/64" (D) x 16-25/64" (H) (115 mm

(W) x 412 mm (D) x 416 mm (H))

Duplex module/bypass tray*

: 17-23/64" (W) x 17-11/64" (D) x 16-25/64"

(H) (441 mm (W) x 436 mm (D) x 416 mm (H))

Weight

Duplex module: Approx. 11.1 lbs. (5 kg)

Duplex module/bypass tray: Approx. 16.6 lbs. (7.5 kg)

Name Exit tray (AR-TE3)

Paper output Print face down

Paper capacity 100 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Paper size Max. 11" x 17" or A3, Min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R or A5R

Paper type and weight to be output

Plain paper, 16 to 28 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m

Heavy paper, 29 to 110 lbs. or 106 to 205 g/m

Exit tray

The tray is extendable to support

large size paper. Extend the tray

when 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",

8-1/2" x 13", A3 or B4 paper is

being used. For a duplex module

(not duplex module/bypass tray),

the exit tray is optional.

This tray can also be used for special

papers including transparency film.

(See next page and page 2-3.)

Bypass tray

Duplex module

Automatic copying on both sides of the

paper is possible.

NOTE

Automatic two-sided printing can

be done only onto plain paper.

Special papers cannot be used

for two-sided printing. (See page

2-4 for explanation on special

paper.)

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

DUPLEX MODULE

3-3

Loading paper in the bypass tray

The bypass tray can be used for plain paper and special paper including labels. Up to 100 sheets of standard paper

can be set. For paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, refer to page 2-3.

Open the bypass tray.

When setting 11"x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13,

A3 or B4 paper, be sure

to extend the bypass tray

extension.

If the bypass tray

extension is not pulled

all the way out the size of

the loaded paper will not

be correctly displayed.

Set the bypass tray paper guides to the

width of the paper to be used.

Insert the paper all the way into the bypass

tray.

Set the paper face down.

If there is a clearance

between the paper and

the paper guides, the

paper may not be fed

correctly. Adjust the

guides so that they

contact the edges of the

paper.

Set the type and size of the loaded paper.

When the paper system is changed from the inch

system to the AB system or vise versa or when the

paper type is changed, the paper type must be

designated. For setting the paper type and paper

size, see page 2-5.

Loading paper in the bypass tray is now

complete.

NOTE

If the paper type or size is changed, be sure to enter the paper type and size as in step 4.

Bypass tray extension

NOTES

● When using 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, A5 paper or

postcards, be sure to load them with their shorter edge

into the feed slot as shown in the illustration.

●

When loading plain paper other than SHARP standard paper,

special media other than postcards, SHARP-recommended

transparency film, or paper to be printed on the back, the

paper must be loaded one sheet at a time. Loading more than

one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.

● When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in

the tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and

reload as a single stack.

● Do not use paper that has already been printed on by

a plain paper fax machine or a laser printer. This may

cause printed images to become dirty.

● Do not use paper that has already been printed on by

a thermal transfer or inkjet printer. In particular, paper

that has been printed on by a thermal transfer printer

(such as a word processor that uses a cassette) may

cause missing characters and smudges.

● When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove

each sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to

stack in the output tray may cause curling.

● Please use SHARP-recommended transparency film.

Place the film in the bypass tray so that it is oriented

vertically with the label side face up. If the label side is

placed face down, smudging may result.

●

When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the bypass

tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before loading.

Label facing up

03.fm 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時３６分

DUPLEX MODULE

3-4

Troubleshooting (concerning the duplex module)

Check the list below before calling for service.

Problem Check Solution or cause

The machine will not

print duplex prints.

Message indicating the paper type

cannot be used for two-sided printing

displayed?

Special paper cannot be used for two-sided

printing. Use a paper type adequate for

two-sided printing. (See pages 2-4 and 3-2.)

Message indicating the paper size

cannot be used for two-sided printing

displayed?

Use a paper size adequate for two-sided

printing. (See pages 2-4 and 3-2.)

Bypass tray extension not extended?

When using 11

x 17

, 8-1/2

x 14

, 8-1/2

x 13

A3 or B4 paper, the bypass tray extension must

be extended.

Printed images onto

paper from the

bypass tray are

skewed.

Does the number of sheets exceed the

limit?

Set paper within the allowable range.

Paper guides properly set? Set the paper guides properly to the paper size.

A paper misfeed

occurs in the bypass

tray.

Paper size and type set properly?

When using non-standard size paper or special

paper, be sure to set the paper size and type.

(See pages 2-3 to 2-5.)

Does the number of sheets exceed the

limit?

Set paper within the allowable range.

Paper guides properly set? Set the paper guides properly to the paper size.

When printing on a

special size of

paper, part of the

printed image is

missing.

The paper size setting is not set

correctly in the paper tray settings of the

system settings.

When using a special size of paper, set the

correct paper size as explained in "

Setting the

paper type and paper size

" on page

2-5

. If the

paper size setting is not correct, part of the image

may be cut off or the image may not print.

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-5

MAIL-BIN STACKER

The mail-bin stacker has 7 mail bins which can each be designated to receive printed output from a user or a group

of users .

Output paper in the copy mode and the fax mode will be delivered to the top tray of the stacker separated from printed

output. (Printed output can also be delivered to the top tray.)

Part names

Specifications

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

NOTES

● Do not put pressure on the mail-bin stacker, particularly on the top tray and mail bins.

● Do not place anything on the top cover. Doing so will interfere with the machine’s paper handling during duplex

printing.

● The top tray and each mail bin are extendable. To print onto large paper (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",

A3 or B4), extend the tray.

● The mail-bin stacker requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be

installed together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are

compatible.

Name Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1)

Number of trays 8 (Top tray and seven mail bins)

Paper output Print face down

Tray type Top tray: normal tray, Mail bins: mail bin tray

Tray capacity

Top tray: 250 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Mail bins: 100 sheets each (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Paper sizes

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Mail bins: 11

x 17

, 8-1/2

x 14

, 8-1/2

x 13

, 8-1/2

x 11

, 8-1/2

x 11

7-1/4

x 10-1/2

, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R

Paper weight

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Mail bins: 15 to 34 lbs. or 60 to 105 g/m

Paper types

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Mail bins: plain paper only

Tray full detection Provided in both the top tray and the mail bins

Power supply Supplied from machine

Dimensions

19-51/64"* (W) x 20-7/8" (D) x 20" (H) (503 mm* (W) x 530 mm (D) x 508 mm (H))

* When the top tray is extended.

Weight Approx. 41.9 lbs. (19 kg)

Each bin can be designated

to receive printed output for

assigned users. These bins

cannot be used for copier or

facsimile output.

Top cover

Open for misfeed removal.

Front cover

Output paper from the printer,

copier, and facsimile features

can be delivered here.

Top tray

Mail bins

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

MAIL-BIN STACKER

3-6

Misfeed in the mail-bin stacker

If a misfeed has occurred in the mail-bin stacker during printing, remove the misfed paper following the procedure

below.

Open the top cover.

Move the tab in the

direction of the arrow as

shown in the illustration

to open the top cover.

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

After removing the

paper, press down on

the top cover to close it.

If the misfed paper is not found in step 2,

open the front cover.

Turn the roller rotating knob in the

direction of the arrow to remove the

misfed paper.

Open the paper guide.

Unlatch the paper guide

and open it in the

direction of the arrow.

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the paper guide.

Close the paper guide

securely.

Close the front cover.

Top cover

Copy_SEC.book 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-7

FINISHER

The finisher can deliver collated sets either stapled or unstapled. Unstapled sets can be offset stacked from the

previous set for easy separation of the sets.

Part names

Specifications

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Supplies

AR-SC1 staple cartridges must be used for this finisher. The cartridge

package contains three cartridges approx. 3000 staples each.

NOTES

● Do not put pressure on the finisher (particularly each tray).

●

Do not place anything on the top cover. Doing so will interfere with the machine’s paper handling during duplex printing.

● The tray moves up and down during operation. Be careful not to impede its movement.

● The finisher requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot be installed

together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are compatible.

Name Finisher (AR-FN6)

Number of trays 2

Paper output Print face down

Tray type Top tray: normal tray, Lower tray: offset tray

Tray capacity

Top tray: 500 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Lower tray: 750 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size, 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Paper sizes

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Lower tray: Max. 8-1/2" x 11" or A4, Min. B5

Paper weight

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit

Lower tray: 16 to 34 lbs. or 60 to 128 g/m

Paper types

Top tray: same as the specifications of paper for feeding in the main unit Lower tray:

plain paper only

Tray full detection Provided in both the top tray and the lower tray

Offset function Provided for the lower tray only. The offset amount is approx. 1 inch (25 mm)

Paper sizes for stapling 8-1/2" x 11", A4, and B5

Stapling capacity

30 sheets* (8-1/2" x 11" or A4 or smaller 20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

*Up two sheets of cover stock (34 lbs. or 128 g/m

) can be included.

Staples

Single staple can be placed in the top left or lower left corners or two staples can be

centered on the left side

Power supply Supplied from machine

Dimensions

18-5/8"* (W) x 20-7/8" (D) x 20" (H) (473 mm* (W) x 530 mm (D) x 508 mm (H))

* When the top tray is extended.

Weight Approx. 46.3 lbs. (21 kg)

Latch

Release the latch to open the

finisher for misfeed removal.

Pull the box out to

replace the staple

cartridge or to

remove jammed

staples.

Staple box

Printer, copier and fax

output can be delivered

here.

To print onto large paper

(11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",

8-1/2" x 13", A3 or B4),

extend the tray.

Top tray

Top cover

Open for misfeed

removal.

Offset tray

Stapled sets or sets to be

offset will be delivered

here.

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

FINISHER

3-8

Finisher functions

■ Sort mode

Sorted sets will be delivered.

■ Offset mode

■ Group mode

Groups of prints or copies of the same page will be

delivered.

Sets will move from side to side so that each set or

group will be offset from the previous set or group

for easy separation. The offset function can only be

used in the offset tray.

Stapled sets will not be offset.

■ Staple sort mode

Collated sets will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. The stapling positions, orientation, paper size for

stapling, and stapling capacity are shown below.

Original

Printouts

Offset mode Non-offset mode

Original

Printouts

Stapling positions

Top left corner of

printouts

Center left two

positions of printouts

Lower left corner

of printouts

Portrait orientation

Landscape orientation

Available paper sizes: 8-1/2"

x 11", A4 and B5

Stapling capacity: Up to 30

sheets for any available sizes

Same as above

Stapling cannot be made.

NOTES

● Stapling can only be done when the offset tray has been selected.

● If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically canceled.

NOTE

Transparency film heavy paper, punched paper, labels , envelopes and postcards cannot be stapled.

Copy_SEC.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

FINISHER

3-9

Using the finisher functions

When the [OUTPUT] key on the main screen of copy mode is touched, a screen for selecting the sort/group/staple

sort functions and selecting an exit tray will appear. As a selection is made, the touch key for the selection will be

highlighted.

(1) [GROUP] key (See page 3-8.)

When Group is selected, all copies of the same

original will be grouped.

(2) [STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-8.)

When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be

stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will

not be offset stacked.)

(3) [SORT] key (See page 3-8.)

When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be

sequentially delivered.

(4) Icon display

An icon representing a selected function (sort,

staple sort or group) is displayed.

(5) [OFFSET] key (See page 3-8.)

If Offset is checked, offset is enabled. If not

checked, offset will not function. If staple sort is

selected, the check mark of offset will be

automatically canceled. If the staple sort function is

selected, the checkmark in the offset checkbox is

automatically removed.

(6) [OFFSET TRAY] key (See page 3-8.)

When the offset tray is selected, copies will be

delivered to the offset tray. When staple sort is

selected, the offset tray will be automatically

selected.

(7) [TOP TRAY] key

When top tray is selected, copies will be delivered

to the top tray.

(8) [OK] key

Press to close the output screen and to return to

the main screen.

STAPLE

SORT

OUTPUT

GROUP

SORT

OFFSET

TRAY

TOP TRAY

OFFSET

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Copy_SEC.book 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

FINISHER

3-10

Staple cartridge replacement

When the staple cartridge becomes empty, the message "Add staples." will appear in the message display of the

operation panel.

Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.

Open the front cover.

Turn the staple unit to face up.

Pull the release lever for the staple box

and remove the box.

Remove the empty staple cartridge from

the staple box.

Insert a new staple cartridge into the

staple box aligning the arrow of the staple

cartridge with that of the staple box.

When reinstalling the

staple box, push it in

until it clicks into plac

Remove the tape from the staple cartridge

by pulling it straight.

Reinstall the staple box.

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

While pushing the staple unit release lever

to the left, rotate the staple unit to face

down.

Close the front cover.

NOTES

● Do not remove the tape from the cartridge before

inserting the staple cartridge into the box.

● When reinstalling the staple box, push it in until it

clicks into place.

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

Copy_SEC.book 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

FINISHER

3-11

■ Checking the staple unit

If the message "CHECK THE STAPLER UNIT" or "CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR STAPLER JAM" appears,

follow the procedure below.

Open the finisher compiler.

Release the latch to

open the finisher

compiler.

Remove the misfed paper from the stapler

compiler.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the finisher compiler.

Open the finisher front cover.

Turn the staple unit to face up.

Pull the release lever for the staple box

and remove the box.

Raise the lever at the end of the staple box.

Remove the top staple if

it is bent. If bent staples

remain, a staple jam will

occur again.

Return the lever to its original position.

Reinstall the staple box.

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

While pushing the staple unit release lever to

the left, rotate the staple unit to face down.

When reinstalling the

staple box, push it in

until it clicks into plac

Close the front cover.

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

Copy_SEC.book 11 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

FINISHER

3-12

Misfeed in the finisher

When a misfeed occurs in the finisher, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.

Remove the misfed paper from the output

area.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Open the finisher top cover.

Move the tab in the

direction of the arrow as

shown in the illustration

to open the top cover.

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

After removing the

paper, press down on

the top cover to close it.

Open the finisher compiler.

Release the latch to

open the finisher

compiler.

Raise the paper guide and remove the

misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the finisher compiler.

Top cover

Paper

guide

Copy_SEC.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

FINISHER

3-13

Troubleshooting finisher problems

Check the list below before calling for service.

Problem Check Solution or cause

The finisher does

not operate.

Are any finisher covers open? Close all covers.

Message indicating need to remove

paper from the stapler compiler

displayed?

Open the finisher

as described in

step 4 on page

3-12 and remove

all paper from the

stapler compiler.

Stapling cannot be

performed.

Is a "CHECK THE STAPLER UNIT" or

"CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR

STAPLER JAM" message displayed?

Check the staple unit. (See page 3-11.)

Is a message "ADD STAPLES"

displayed?

Replace the staple cartridge. (See page 3-10.)

Different size paper included?

Stapling cannot be performed onto different size

paper.

Stapled sets are not

stacked correctly or

some sheets in a set

are not stapled.

Paper heavily curled?

Paper may be curled heavily depending on the

paper type and quality. Remove paper from the

paper tray or the bypass tray, turn it upside down,

and load it again.

Copy_SEC.book 13 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-14

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two staples for centerline binding of prints or copies and fold them

along the centerline.

An optional hole punching unit is available for installation into the finisher.

Part names

Specifications

(Continued on next page)

NOTES

● Do not press on the saddle stitch finisher (particularly the offset tray).

● Be careful about the offset tray during printing because the tray moves up and down.

● The saddle stitch finisher requires the installation of other peripheral devices in order to be functional and cannot

be installed together with some other devices. The table on page 8-4 shows the configurations which are

compatible.

Name Saddle stitch finisher (AR-FN7)

Number of trays 2

Paper output Print face down

Tray system Upper tray: offset tray, Lower tray: saddle stitch tray

Tray capacity

Upper tray:

Non-stapling: Max. 1,000 sheets for 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 or smaller sizes (20 lbs. or 80

g/m

), max. 500 sheets for 8-1/2" x 13" or B4 or larger sizes (20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Stapling: Max. 50 stapled sets and max. 1,000 sheets for 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 or smaller

sizes (20 lbs. or 80 g/m

), max. 30 stapled sets and max. 500 sheets for 8-1/2" x 13"

or B4 or larger sizes (20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

Lower tray: Stapled print capacity is (6 - 10) sheets x 10 sets or (1 - 5) sheets x 20

sets.

Paper size

Upper tray: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x

10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R

Lower tray: max. 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4, A4R

Paper weight

Upper tray: 16 to 54 lbs. or 60 to 205 g/m

Lower tray: 17 to 34 lbs. or 64 to 80 g/m

Paper types

Upper tray: plain paper, thick paper, transparency film

Lower tray: plain paper only

Tray full detection Provided in both trays

Offset function Upper tray only

Paper sizes for stapling

Upper tray: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3,

B4, A4, A4R, and B5

Lower tray: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4, and A4R

Saddle stitched output is delivered

here.

Saddle stitch tray

utput which is stapled or offset will

be delivered to this tray.

Offset tray

Open the front cover and

pull out this section to

replace the staple

cartridge or to remove

jammed staples.

Stapler section

Paper to be stapled is stacked

temporarily.

Stapler compiler

Open the front cover and pull out this

section for staple cartridge

replacement or to remove jammed

Front cover

Open for misfeed removal.

Top cover

Copy_SEC.book 14 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-15

Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.

Supplies

AR-SC2 staple cartridges must be used for this finisher. The cartridge package

contains three cartridges approx. 5000 staples each.

Saddle stitch finisher functions

■ Sort mode

Sorted sets will be delivered.

■ Offset mode

■ Group mode

Groups of copies of the same page will be

delivered.

Sets will move from side to side so that each set or

group will be offset from the previous set or group

for easy separation. The offset function can only be

used in the offset tray.

Stapled sets will not be offset.

Stapling capacity

8-1/2" x 11" or A4 or smaller size: 50 sheets*(20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

8-1/2" x 14" or B4 or larger size: 25 sheets*(20 lbs. or 80 g/m

)

*Up to two sheets of 34 lbs. or 128 g/m

paper can be included as covers.

Staples

Upper tray: Single staple can be placed in the top left or lower left corners or two

staples can be centered on the left side.

Lower tray: 4-47/64" (120 mm) pitch from the center of paper

Power supply Supplied from machine

Dimensions

29-41/64"* (W) x 23-3/4" (D) x 37-33/64" (H) (753 mm* (W) x 603 mm (D) x 953 mm (H))

*When the top tray is extended.

Weight Approx. 86 lbs. (39 kg)

Name Punch module

Paper sizes for hole

punching

3 holes: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11", A3, A4

2 holes: 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"R

PrintoutsOriginal

Offset mode Non-offset mode

PrintoutsOriginal

Copy_SEC.book 15 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-16

■ Staple sort mode

Collated sets of prints or copies will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. When saddle stitching is selected,

the prints or copies will be stapled at the center and delivered to the saddle stitch tray. The stapling positions,

orientation, paper size for stapling, and stapling capacity are shown below.

■ Original orientation when using the staple sort or punch function

When using the staple sort or punch function, the original must be placed in the following orientations to enable

stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.

Stapling positions

Top left corner of

printouts

Center left two

positions of

printouts

Lower left corner

of printouts

Portrait orientation

Landscape orientation

Available paper sizes: 8-1/2"

x 11", A4 and B5

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for any sizes

Same as above

Available paper sizes: 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2"

x 11" R, A3, B4, and A4R

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for 8-1/2" x 11"R, A4R

and B5R, and up to 25 sheets

for other sizes

Available paper sizes: 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2"

x 11" R, A3, B4, and A4R

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for 8-1/2" x 11"R, A4R

and B5R, and up to 25 sheets

for other sizes

Saddle stitch on

centerfold line.

Paper in the portrait direction

cannot be saddle stitched.

Available paper sizes: 11" x

17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4,

and A4R

Stapling capacity: Up to 10

sheets for any sizes

Available paper sizes: 11" x 17",

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2"

x 11" R, A3, B4, and A4R

Stapling capacity: Up to 50

sheets for 8-1/2" x 11"R, A4R

and B5R, and up to 25 sheets

for other sizes

Staple sort

Document feeder Document glass

Punch

Document feeder Document glass

03.fm 16 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時２５分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-17

■ Saddle stitch function

The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two

staples for centerline binding of prints or copies and fold

them along the centerline.

■ Hole punching (only if a punch module is

installed)

If the saddle stitch finisher is equipped with a hole punch

module, printed paper can be hole punched and delivered

to the offset tray. Saddle stitching and hole punching

cannot be selected at the same time. The automatic image

rotation will not function when the hole punching function

is used.

Two or three holes can be punched depending on the

paper size. (See paper sizes for hole punching on page

4-4.)

If the punching function is enabled for a paper size that

cannot be punched, the paper will be output without being

punched. (For paper sizes that can be punched, see the

specifications on page 3-15.) When using the punching

function in copy mode, place the original with the top edge

toward the back of the machine. If the original is not placed

in this orientation, punching will not take place at the

correct positions.

{Original 2}

{Punch positions}

{Original 1}

{Punch positions}

Copy_SEC.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-18

Using the saddle stitch finisher

When [OUTPUT] is selected on the main screen of copy mode, a screen for making selections for sort, group, staple

sort, saddle stitch, punch and exit tray will appear.

(1) [GROUP] key (See page 3-15.)

When Group is selected, all copies of the same

original will be grouped.

(2) [STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-16.)

When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be

stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will

not be offset stacked.)

(3) [SORT] key (See page 3-15.)

When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be

sequentially delivered.

(4) Icon display

An icon representing a selected function (sort,

staple sort or group saddle stitch) is displayed.

(5) [OFFSET TRAY] key

If Offset is checked, the offset will be enabled. If not

checked, the offset will not function. If the staple

sort is selected, the check mark of offset will be

automatically selected.

(6) [CENTER TRAY] key

If the center tray is selected, output paper will be

delivered to the exit tray.

(7) [OK] key

Press to close the [OUTPUT] screen and to return

to the main screen.

(8) [OFFSET] key (See page 3-15.)

When the offset tray is selected, copies will be

delivered to the offset tray. When staple sort is

selected, the offset tray will be automatically

canceled.

(9) [SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 3-17.)

When saddle stitching is selected, the copies will

be stapled at the center and delivered to the saddle

stitch tray.

(10)

[PUNCH] key (See page 3-17.)

If the saddle stitch finisher is equipped with a punch

module, printed paper can be hole punched and

delivered to the offset tray.

* As a selection is made, the touch key for the

selection will be highlighted.

OUTPUT

OFFSET

SADDLE

STITCH

PUNCH

OFFSET

TRAY

CENTER

TRAY

STAPLE

SORT

GROUP

(1)

(8)

(2)

(9) (10)

(4)(5) (6) (7)

(3)

Copy_SEC.book 18 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-19

Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal

When the staple cartridge becomes empty or staples become jammed, a message will appear in the message

display of the operation panel.

Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.

■ Staple cartridge replacement

Open the front cover.

Pull out the stapler section.

Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction

of the arrow to move the staple unit to the

front.

Turn the roller rotating

knob until the triangle

mark is aligned with the

index.

Remove the empty staple box.

Remove the empty staple cartridge.

Press the lock button to

unlock the staple box

cover and remove the

staple cartridge.

Insert a new staple cartridge into the

staple box.

After inserting the staple

cartridge, press down on

the staple box cover to

lock the cartridge in

place.

Remove the tape from the staple cartridge

by pulling it straight.

Insert the staple box.

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

Push the stapler section back into the

finisher.

Close the front cover.

NOTE

If staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be

removed.

Roller rotating

Staple unit

knob A

NOTES

● Do not remove the tape from the cartridge before

inserting the staple cartridge into the box.

● Make sure that the staple cartridge is secured

firmly.

● When reinstalling the staple box, push it in until it

clicks into plac

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

Copy_SEC.book 19 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-20

■ Staple jam removal

Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide

it away from the machine.

Open the front cover.

Turn roller rotating knob C as shown in the

illustration until the blue indication is

seen.

Remove the paper from the stapler

compiler.

If saddle stitch was selected, open the

saddle stitch section cover.

Remove the misfed paper.

Be careful not to tear the

misfed paper during

removal.

Close the saddle stitch section cover.

Open the front cover and pull out the

stapler unit.

Roller rotating

knob C

Blue

Copy_SEC.book 20 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-21

Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction

of the arrow to move the staple unit to the

front.

Turn the roller rotating

knob until the triangle

mark is aligned with the

index.

Remove the staple box.

Raise the lever at the end of the staple box.

Remove the top staple if

it is bent. If bent staples

remain, a staple jam will

occur again.

Return the lever to its original position.

Reinstall the staple box.

Push the staple box in

until it clicks into place.

Push the stapler section back into the finisher.

Close the front cover.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back against the

machine.

■ Disposal of hole punch scrap

Unlatch the saddle stitch finisher and slide

it away from the machine.

Pull out the punch scrap collecting

container and empty it.

Empty the punch debris

into a plastic bag or

other container for

disposal, taking care not

to spill any of the punch

debris.

Return the punch scrap collecting

container to its original position.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back

against the machine.

Staple unit

Roller rotating

knob A

NOTE

Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to

ensure that stapling is performed properly.

Copy_SEC.book 21 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-22

Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher

When a misfeed occurs in the saddle stitch finisher, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.

Press the detach button and separate the

saddle stitch finisher from the machine.

Remove any misfed paper from the

machine.

If there was no misfed paper in step 2, pull

roller rotating knob B on the punch unit

toward you and rotate it. (Only when an

optional punch unit is installed.)

Rotating roller rotating

knob B releases the

caught paper.

Open the top cover.

Remove the misfed paper.

Remove the paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

Close the top cover.

Remove any misfed paper from the stapler

compiler.

Remove the paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

Open the cover of the saddle stitch

section.

Remove the misfed paper.

Remove the paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

CAUTION

The saddle stitch finisher and the machine are

connected at the rear. Exercise caution when pulling

them apart.

Roller rotating

knob B

Copy_SEC.book 22 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-23

Open the front cover.

Rotate roller rotating knob D in the direction of

the arrow.

Remove any misfed paper from the saddle

stitch tray.

Remove the paper

gently, taking care not to

tear it.

Close the cover of the saddle stitch section.

Close the front cover.

Push the saddle stitch finisher back onto the

machine.

Roller rotating knob D

Copy_SEC.book 23 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

3-24

Troubleshooting (concerning the saddle stitch finisher)

Check the list below before calling for service.

* When a punch module is installed

Problem Check Solution or cause

The saddle stitch

finisher does not

operate.

Are any saddle stitch finisher covers open? Close all covers. (See page 3-14.)

Message indicating need to remove paper

from the stapler compiler displayed?

Remove all remaining paper from the stapler

compiler referring to step 4 on page 3-20.

Stapling cannot be

performed (including

saddle stitch).

Message requesting check for the staple

unit displayed?

Remove jammed staples. (See page 3-20.)

Message requesting adding staples

displayed?

Replace the staple cartridge. (See page

3-19.) Check that a staple cartridge has been

installed. (See page 3-20.)

Different size paper included?

Stapling cannot be performed onto different

size paper.

Stapled sets are not

stacked correctly or

some sheets in a set

are not stapled.

Paper heavily curled?

Paper may be curled heavily depending on the

paper type and quality. Remove paper from

the paper tray or the bypass tray, turn it upside

down, and load it again.

Punching does not

take place in the

correct positions.*

The punching function is not set for the

correct positions.

Check the positions where punching is

possible.

Cannot be punched.*

Message requesting check for punch

module displayed?

Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 3-21.)

Different size paper included?

Stapling cannot be performed onto different

size paper.

The paper is badly curled and is not

punched.

Some types and qualities of paper may curl

badly when printed on. Remove the paper

from the tray or bypass tray, turn it around to

reverse the top and bottom, and then place it

back in the tray.

Copy_SEC.book 24 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-25

SHARP OSA

Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly

connected to a digital multifunction machine over a network.

When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions

of the machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.

There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external

account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A

"standard application" refers to all other applications.

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION

MODULE (MX-AMX2)

The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.

When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine

retrieves the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard

application, and Scan to FTP can be executed.

Standard application setup

To register a standard application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the administrator menu

frame and then click [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard application in the screen that

appears.

Selecting a standard application

There are two methods for selecting a standard application that has been registered in the machine's Web pages.

■ Selecting a standard application from the job status screen

The Sharp OSA icon will appear in the lower left-hand corner of the job status screen. Follow the steps below to

select a standard application.

Touch the Sharp OSA icon.

If no standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the key cannot be

touched.

Select the standard application.

If two or more standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the screen to select the

standard application will

appear. Touch the

standard application that

you wish to use.

If only one standard application has been stored in

the Web pages, connection to the standard

application will begin.

The machine connects to the standard

application.

The message "Connecting to the external

application." appears while the machine

communicates with the standard application.

App 04

App 03

App 02

App 01

Copy_SEC.book 25 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)

3-26

■ Selecting the standard application from document filing mode

The [Sharp OSA] key appears in the upper right-hand corner of the document filing screen. Follow the steps

below to select a standard application.

Touch the [Sharp OSA] key.

If no standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the key cannot be

touched.

Select the standard application.

If one or more standard

applications have been

stored in the Web pages,

the screen to select the

standard application will

appear. Touch the

standard application that

you wish to use.

If only one standard application has been stored in

the Web pages, connection to the standard

application will begin.

The machine connects to the standard

application.

The message "Connecting to the external

application." appears while the machine

communicates with the standard application.

Operation in OSA mode

When the application communication module is installed, it is possible to check the job log of OSA scan mode in the

job status screen. The procedure for displaying the job log is the same as for regular Scan to FTP.

To display the job log of OSA scan mode, touch the [SCAN] key once again while the job log of scan mode appears

in the job status screen. (When this is done, the name of the key will change to [OSA SCAN].) To return to the scan

screen from the OSA scan screen, touch the [OSA SCAN] key.

FILE RETRIEVE

SharpOSA

FILE

FOLER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

App 04

App 03

App 02

App 01

Copy_SEC.book 26 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

3-27

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)

The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.

An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When

external authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.

When a job ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated

user.

When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result

notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used,

however, the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.

External account application setup

To register an external account application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the

administrator menu frame and then click [External Accounting]. Configure settings for the external account

application in the screen that appears. To make the settings in the Web page take effect, restart the machine.

Operation in external account mode

The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.

■ External authentication mode

When the [ENABLE AUTHENTICATION BY EXTERNAL SERVER] checkbox is selected in "External account

setting" of "Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external authentication mode.

When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account

application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [CALL] key is touched to run

a job in the job status complete screen. (The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by

the normal method.)

The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return

to the previous state, press the mode select key.

■ External count mode

When only the [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT CONTROL] setting is enabled in "External account setting" of

"Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external count mode.

Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of

the external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application.

External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode

can also be used when the user control function is disabled.)

NOTES

● The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.

● The [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the system settings

screen. To return to the initial state, touch the [EXIT] key.

If login fails

If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating

correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine.

For more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.

If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the

steps below.

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External account setting" in the administrator settings (see page

14 of the administrator settings guide). After changing the setting, restart the machine.

Copy_SEC.book 27 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 28 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Part 2: Copier Operation

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-1

CHAPTER 4

MAKING COPIES

This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including

selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings.

Page

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER ...................................................... 4-2

●

Acceptable originals........................................................................ 4-2

PLACING ORIGINALS............................................................................ 4-3

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL................................. 4-5

●

Manually setting the scanning size ................................................. 4-5

STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES ........................ 4-6

●

Storing or deleting an original size.................................................. 4-6

NORMAL COPYING ............................................................................... 4-7

●

Making copies with the automatic document feeder ....................... 4-7

●

Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic document feeder

.... 4-10

●

Copying from the document glass................................................... 4-11

●

Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass .................. 4-13

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE .....................................................................

4-14

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM................................................... 4-15

●

Automatic selection (auto image).................................................... 4-15

●

Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).................................... 4-16

●

XY ZOOM........................................................................................ 4-18

SPECIAL PAPERS.................................................................................. 4-20

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-2

AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER

The automatic document feeder automatically feeds originals into the machine, making continuous copying possible.

In addition, both sides of two-sided sheet originals can be simultaneously scanned. This function is convenient when

you have a large number of original pages to scan.

Acceptable originals

A stack of up to 50 original sheets (30 original sheets*

for 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) or larger) of the same size paper can be

set in the document feeder tray provided the stack height is within the limit shown below.

A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of the originals is the same and the stack height is within

the limit shown below. In this case, however, stapling and duplex will not function and some special functions may not

give the expected result.

*1 For paper heavier than 28 lbs. (105 g/m

), only a stack of up to 15 sheets can be set. Setting 16 or more sheets

may cause incorrect scanning of original and scanned image may become expanded compared with original

itself.

■ Size and weight of acceptable

originals

■ Total number of originals that can be

set in the document feeder tray

■ Notes on use of the automatic document feeder

●Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause

an original misfeed.

●Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.

●If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they

are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.

●Do not use the following originals. These originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original

misfeeds, and smudges on copies.

●

Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink

ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be

damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple

punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.

●When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the

punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.

Original size:

(148 x 210 mm)

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

or A5

11" x 17"

or A3

(297 x 420 mm)

Weight (thickness):

14 lbs. or

50g/m

34 lbs. or

128 g/m

g/m

... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m

Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 1/4" or

6.5 mm (for 14 to 21 lbs. or 50 to 80

g/m paper).

1/4" or 6.5 mm

or less

Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 3/16" or

5.0 mm (for 21 to 34 lbs. or 80 to 128 g/m paper).

3/16" or 5.0 mm

or less

Hole positions

Hole

positions

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-3

PLACING ORIGINALS

■ Using the automatic document

feeder

Open the document cover, make sure that

an original has not been left on the

document glass, and then gently close the

document cover.

Adjust the original guides to the size of the

originals.

Place the originals face down in the

document feeder tray.

Place the originals face

down.

Insert the originals all

the way into the

document feeder. The

stack height must not be

higher than the indicator

line (maximum of 50 pages).

■ Using the document glass

Open the document cover, place the

original face down on the document glass,

and then gently close the document cover.

To make a copy of a

small original such as a

postcard, use the

[PAPER SELECT] key to

select the desired paper

size.

●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

●Place the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

NOTES

● After placing the original, be sure to close the

document cover. If left open, parts outside of the

original will be copied black, causing excessive

use of toner.

● Do not place any objects under the original size

detector, because they may damage it or the

original size may not be detected properly.

Original size detector

Original scale

mark

Original scale

mark

5½ x 8½

or A5

8½x11 or A4 11x17 or A3

8½x14

or B4

8½x11R or A4R

NOTE

Original size detection function

One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size

detection function. The factory default setting is "INCH-1". The setting can be changed using "ORIGINAL SIZE

DETECTOR SETTING" in the administrator settings.

Group

Detectable original sizes

Document feeder tray (for automatic document feeder)

Document glass

INCH-1

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Document glass + A3, A4

INCH-2

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Document glass + A3, A4

3 AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5,B4, B5, B5R

Document glass + 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11",

216x330

4 AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R, 216x330

Document glass + 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11",

04.fm 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時４３分

PLACING ORIGINALS

4-4

■ Standard original placement orientations

Place originals in the

document feeder tray or on

the document glass so that

the top and bottom of the

original is positioned as

shown in the illustration. If not,

staples will be incorrectly

positioned and some special

features may not give the

expected result.

■ Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying

If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90°

and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable

for rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size or staple sorting with the saddle

stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible.

[Example]

●This function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode. (

Rotation copy setting

can be

disabled with a administrator setting. See page 16 of the administrator settings guide.)

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Document feeder tray

Document glass

[Example 1]

[Example 2]

Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation

Face down

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-5

CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED

ORIGINAL

If the placed original is a standard size, the size will be automatically

detected (automatic original detection function) and displayed in the touch

panel. Make sure that the correct size has been detected.

(A) :The original size is displayed.

(B) :[AUTO] appears when the automatic original detection function is

operating.

If you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the

scanning size, you can follow the steps below to manually set the original

scanning size. (For the standard sizes, see "Original size detection

function" on page 4-3.)

Manually setting the scanning size

If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an AB size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you must

touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the document

in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.

Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

Touch the desired original size key.

[AUTO] is no longer

highlighted. [MANUAL]

and the original size key

you touched are

highlighted.

If you wish to select an AB size, touch the

[AB/INCH] key and then touch the desired

original size key.

[AB] is highlighted and

AB size keys are

displayed. To return to

the inch palette, touch

the [AB/INCH] key once

again.

If a non-standard size original is placed in

the document feeder or on the document

glass, touch the [SIZE INPUT] tab and then

enter the X (width) and Y (length)

dimensions of the original.

X is initially selected.

Enter the X dimension

(width) and then touch

the Y( ) key and enter

the Y dimension (length).

X can be from 2-1/2 to 17

inch, and Y can be from

2-1/2 to 11-5/8 inch.

If you frequently use originals that are the same

non-standard size, you can store the size as

explained in "STORING, DELETING, AND USING

ORIGINAL SIZES" on the following page. This will

save you the trouble of manually entering the size

each time you use that original size.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the initial screen.

The selected original size appears in the

top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

8 x11

(B)(A)

NOTE

If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed,

or the original size may not appear at all.

If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is enabled in the administrator settings (see page 11 of the

administrator settings guide), automatic original detection at the document glass will not operate. In this case,

follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

STANDARD SIZE

SIZE INPUT

INCH

A5R

STANDARD SIZE

SIZE INPUT

INCH

A4R

B5R

(2 1/2 11 5/8)

inch

(2 1/2 17)

inch

STANDARD SIZE SIZE INPUT

11 5/8

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-6

STORING, DELETING, AND USING

ORIGINAL SIZES

Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored. Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is

turned off. Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you

copy that size of document.

● To cancel an original size storing, using, or deleting operation, touch the [ORIGINAL] key on the screen.

Storing or deleting an original size

Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

Touch the [CUSTOM SIZE] key.

Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

Touch the original size key ( ) that

you wish to store or delete.

To store an original size,

touch a key that does not

show a size ( ).

Keys that already have

an original size stored

will show the stored size

().

To delete or change a stored size, touch the key

that shows the size that you wish to delete or

change.

●If you are storing an original size, go to step 5.

●To delete or change an original size, go to

step 7.

Enter the X (width) and Y (length)

dimensions of the original with the

keys.

X (width) is initially

selected.

Enter X and then touch

the ( ) key to enter Y.

A width of 2-1/2 to 17

inches can be entered in

X, and a length of 2-1/2

to 11-5/8 inches can be entered in Y.

Touch the [OK] key.

The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the

key selected in step 4.

To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

When you touch a key that shows an

original size in step 4, a message screen

appears that contains the keys [CANCEL],

[DELETE], and [AMEND].

●To cancel the procedure, touch the [CANCEL]

key.

●To delete the selected original size, touch the

[DELETE] key.

●To change the original size stored in the key,

touch the [AMEND] key. The screen of step 5

will appear to let you change the size.

To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

■ USING A STORED ORIGINAL SIZE

Follow steps 1 to 2 of "STORING OR

DELETING AN ORIGINAL SIZE".

Touch the original size key that you wish

to use.

Touch the [OK] key.

The stored original size is called up.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

AUTO

E INPUT

CUSTOM

SIZE

EXPOSURE

PAPER SE

COPY RAT

100%

AUTO

8 x1

MANUAL

AUTO

INCH

STORE/DELETE

CUSTO

SIZE

MANUA

AUTO

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

X5 Y10

CANCEL OK

11 5/8

(2 1/2 17)

inch

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

(2 1/2 11 5/8)

inch

RECALL

STORE/DELETE

X5 Y10

Copy_SEC.book 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-7

NORMAL COPYING

This section describes the normal copying procedure.

Making copies with the automatic document feeder

■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)

Make sure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy

mode is selected.

The one-sided to one-

sided mode is selected

when no icon for a two-

sided mode appears in

the dashed area on the

display. If the 1-sided to

1-sided copy mode is

already selected, steps 3 to 5 are not needed.

Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.

Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key.

Touch the [1-sided to 1-

sided copy] key.

Touch the [OK] key.

Make sure that paper of the same size as

the originals is automatically selected*.

The selected tray will be

highlighted or the

message "LOAD xxxxxx

PAPER." will appear. If

the message appears,

load paper in a paper

tray with paper of the

required size.

Even if the message above appears, copying can

be performed onto the currently selected paper.

*The following requirements must be satisfied.

Originals of a standard size (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x

14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R"

(A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5)) are set and the

auto paper select function is enabled.

If originals of a size other

than the sizes above are

to be copied, manually

select the desired paper

size by touching the

[PAPER SELECT] key

and then touching the

desired paper size selection key.

The selected key will be highlighted and the paper

selection screen will close. To close the paper

selection screen without making a selection, touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key.

Original Copy

ORIGINAL

8 x11

11x17

8 x11R

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

AUTO

100%

8 x11

PAPER SELECT

EXPOSURE

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

8 x11

PLAIN

1. 8 x11

2. 11x17

3. 11x17

4. 8 x11

PLAIN

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

NORMAL COPYING

4-8

Select the desired output mode (page 4-9).

The sort mode is the

default mode.

To select the group

mode, touch the

[OUTPUT] key, then

touch the [GROUP] key

on the output setting

screen, and then touch the [OK] key on the setting

screen.

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0". Use the [C] (clear)

key to cancel an entry if

a mistake has been made.

Press the [START] key.

If the [C] key is pressed

while originals are being

scanned, scanning will

stop. If copying had

already started, copying

and scanning will stop

after the original in

progress is output to the original exit area. In these

cases the copy quantity will be reset to "0".

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

FILE

LOGOUT

NOTES

● The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the

default in the initial settings. If the default setting

has not been changed using the "Initial status

settings" (administrator settings), steps 3 to 5 on

page 4-7 can be omitted.

To cancel copying...

To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA]

key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch

the [YES] key to cancel copying.

Copy_SEC.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

NORMAL COPYING

4-9

■ Copy output (sort and group)

Example: Making five sets or five copies each of three originals

● Sorting copies into sets

● Grouping copies by page

■ Selecting the output tray (when an optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher is

installed)

When the [OFFSET TRAY] key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the offset tray of the finisher or

saddle stitch finisher. When the "CENTER TRAY" key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the center

tray. Touch the appropriate key to select the desired output tray.

This screen appears when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.

The screen that appears when a finisher is installed is slightly different.

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

LOGOUT

OUTPUT

SORT

GROUP

Original

Press the [START]

key

Set the

number of

copies (5)

Touch the

[OUTPUT] key

Touch the

[SORT] key

Five sets of copies

When using the automatic document feeder, sorting is

automatically selected when the original is placed in the

document feeder.

LOGOUT

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

SORT

GROUP

Press the [START]

key

Set the

number of

copies (5)

Touch the

[OUTPUT] key

Touc h the

[GROUP] key

"Group" is automatically selected when the

original is placed on the document glass.

5 copies per page

Original

OUTPUT

SORT

GROUP

STAPLE

SORT

OFFSET

TRAY

CENTER

TRAY

OFFSET

PUNCH

SADDLE

STITCH

Copy_SEC.book 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

NORMAL COPYING

4-10

Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic

document feeder

When the optional duplex module is installed, the following automatic two-sided copying can be performed. The

paper is automatically turned over during copying, allowing two-sided copies to be made with ease.

1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided

originals

2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided

originals

3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided

originals

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)

Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.

Select the desired copy mode.

The display will vary

depending on the

equipment installed.

When making automatic two-sided copies of a

one-sided 11" x 17" (A3) or 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size

portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top

and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,

touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.

Touch the [OK] key.

Perform steps 6 through 9 on pages 4-7 and 4-8.

Original

Copy

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot

be selected, a double beep will sound.

DED COPY

BIND

CHA

Example of a

portrait-oriented

original

Example of a

landscape-oriented

original

BINDING

Copy_SEC.book 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

NORMAL COPYING

4-11

Copying from the document glass

When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the

document cover and copy the originals from the document glass.

■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals

Place the original on the document glass.

(pages 4-3 to 4-6)

●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

●Place the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy

mode is selected.

The one-sided to one-

sided mode is selected

when no icon for a two-

sided mode appears in

the dashed area on the

display. If an icon

appears, perform steps

3 to 5 on page 4-7 and then go to step 3.

Ensure that paper of the same size as the

original is automatically selected*.

The selected tray will be

highlighted or the

message "LOAD xxxxxx

PAPER." will appear. If

the message appears,

load paper in a paper

tray with paper of the

required size.

Even if the message above is displayed, copying

can be performed onto the currently selected

paper.

* The following requirements must be satisfied.

Originals of a standard size (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",

8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A3,

B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5)) are set and the auto

paper select function is enabled.

If originals of a size other

than the sizes above are

to be copied, manually

select the desired paper

size by touching the

[PAPER SELECT] key

and then touching the

desired paper size selection key.

The selected key will be highlighted and the paper

selection screen will close. To close the paper

selection screen without making a selection, touch

the [PAPER SELECT] key.

Original Copy

Original scale

mark

Original scale

mark

5½ x 8½

or A5

8½x11 or A4 11x17 or A3

8½x14

or B4

8½x11R or A4R

ORIGINAL

8 x11

11x17

8 x11R

AUTO

100%

8 x11

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

8 x11

PLAIN

1. 8 x11

2. 11x17

3. 11x17

4. 8 x11

PLAIN

04.fm 11 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時４３分

NORMAL COPYING

4-12

Select the desired output mode. (page 4-

9.)

Group mode is the

default mode.

To select sort mode,

touch the [OUTPUT]

key, touch the [SORT]

key in the screen that

appears, and then touch

the [OK] key.

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

Press the [START] key.

Replace the original with

the next original and

press the [START] key.

Repeat this operation

until all originals have

been scanned.

If you selected "Sort" for

the output mode in step 4 and pressed the

[START] key, it is necessary to touch the [READ-

END] key.

Touch the [READ-END] key.

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

FILE

LOGOUT

To cancel copying...

To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key.

A confirmation message will appear. Touch the

[YES] key to cancel copying.

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].

Copy_SEC.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

NORMAL COPYING

4-13

Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass

When the optional duplex module is installed, the following automatic two-sided copying can be performed. The

paper is automatically turned over during copying, allowing two-sided copies to be made with ease.

Place the original on the document glass.

(pages 4-3 to 4-6)

●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the

arrow mark on the document glass scale.

●Place the original in the appropriate position for its

size as shown above.

Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.

Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key.

When making automatic two-sided copies of a

one-sided 11" x 17" (A3) or 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size

portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top

and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,

touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.

Touch the [OK] key.

Perform steps 3 to 7 on pages 4-11 and 4-12.

Original Copy

Original scale

mark

Original scale

mark

5½ x 8½

or A5

8½x11 or A4 11x17 or A3

8½x14

or B4

8½x11R or A4R

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

Example of a

portrait-oriented

original

Example of a

landscape-oriented

original

BINDING

04.fm 13 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時４４分

4-14

ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE

Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO

and PHOTO.

■ Automatic exposure adjustment

The default exposure

setting is "AUTO", which

automatically adjusts

the exposure for the

original. To select the

exposure mode, or to

manually adjust the

exposure level, follow the steps below.

■ Selecting the exposure mode and manually adjusting the exposure level

Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.

Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO]

as appropriate for the original to be

copied.

To select [TEXT], touch the [AUTO MANUAL]

key so that [MANUAL] is selected.

Adjust the exposure level.

Touch the key to

make darker copies.

Touch the key to

make lighter copies.

AUTO

AUTO 8 x11

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

EXPOSURE

Exposure modes selection

TEXT: This mode is useful for producing

dark text copies with minimum

background.

TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for

copying an original which contains

both text and photos. This mode is

also useful for copying printed

photographs.

PHOTO: This mode provides the best copies

of photographs with fine details.

AUTO

AUTO 8 x11

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

EXPOSURE

ORIGINAL

IMAGE TYPE

TEXT

AUTO MANUAL

531

TEXT/PHOTO

PHOTO

AUTO

AUTO 8 x11

100%

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

NOTE

Exposure levels in TEXT mode

1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper

3: Normal density originals

4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light color

characters

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

NOTES

● To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch

the [AUTO / MANUAL] key to highlight [AUTO],

and then touch the [OK] key.

● The exposure level used in automatic exposure

mode can be adjusted in the administrator

settings. See "Exposure adjustment" on page 16

of the administrator settings guide)

AUTO MANUAL

1 3 5

Copy_SEC.book 14 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

4-15

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected automatically or manually.

● Automatic selection: Auto image (see below)

● Manual selection: Preset copy ratios/zoom (see page 4-16)

Automatic selection (auto image)

The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size.

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

The detected original size will be displayed.

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then

select the desired paper size.

The selected paper size

key is highlighted and

the paper selection

screen closes.

Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.

The [AUTO IMAGE] key

will be highlighted and

the best reduction or

enlargement ratio for the

original size and the

selected paper size will

be selected and

displayed in the copy ratio display.

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

Press the [START] key.

If you placed the original

on the document glass,

set the output mode to

"Sort", and pressed the

[START] key, you must

touch the [READ-END]

key after all pages of the

original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)

NOTE

Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the

following original and paper sizes. It cannot be used

for other sizes. However, in the case of non-standard

original and paper sizes, the sizes can be entered to

make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those

sizes.

Original sizes:Standard sizes (see "Original size

detection function" on page 4-3.)

Paper size: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-

1/2" x 11"R, or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A3,

B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R)

NOTE

If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,

load paper of the required size in a paper tray. (See

"Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-5.)

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

8 x11

PLAIN

1. 8 x11

2. 11x17

3. 11x17

4. 8 x11

PLAIN

5.8 x11

AUTO

IMAGE

129%

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

NOTE

If the message "ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM TO

" is displayed, change the orientation of the

original as indicated in the message. When the

message above is displayed, copying can be done

without changing the orientation, but the image will

not fit the paper correctly.

To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [CA] key.

LOGOUT

Copy_SEC.book 15 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-16

Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom)

Preset ratios (maximum 400%, minimum 25%) can be selected with the enlargement and reduction keys. In addition,

the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

<The administrator setting on page 16 of the administrator settings guide can be used to set two additional

enlargement ratios and two additional reduction ratios.>

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.

Use the [MENU] key to select menu " " or

menu " " for copy ratio selection.

●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:

77% and 64% (for the inch system).

70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).

●

B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:

121% and 129% (for the inch system).

115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).

●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:

50% and 25%.

●B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:

200% and 400%.

(The custom ratios set by the administrator appear

in ratio menu 2.)

Use the reduction, enlargement, and

[ZOOM] keys on the touch panel to set the

desired copy ratio.

Zoom ratios: Any ratio

from 25% to 400% can

be set in 1% increments.

Touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio, or the

[ ] key to decrease

the ratio. (If you continue

to touch the [ ]/[ ] key, the ratio will change

automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will

change rapidly.)

Touch the [OK] key.

NOTE

When the original is placed in the document feeder,

the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.

AUTO

100%

8 X11

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

AUTO 8 x11

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

IMAGE

EXPOSURE

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

AUTO

8 x11

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

IMAGE

EXPOSURE

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

NOTES

● Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the

approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio or the [ ] key to decrease the

ratio.

● Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key

is continuously touched can be disabled in the

administrator settings (see "Key operation setting

(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the

administrator settings guide).

● If the message "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY

PAPER." appears when a ratio is selected, the

image may not fit on the copy paper.

● To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios

separately, use the XY ZOOM feature. See page

4-18.

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

AUTO

AUTO 8 x11

ORIGINAL

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

AUTO

IMAGE

EXPOSURE

Copy_SEC.book 16 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-17

Make sure that an appropriate paper size

has been selected based on the selected

ratio.

Auto paper select display

Use the numeric keys to set the desired

number of copies.

Up to 999 can be set.

If you are only making a

single copy, the copy can

be made with the copy

number display showing

"0".

Use the [C] (clear) key to

cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.

Press the [START] key.

If you placed the original

on the document glass,

set the output to "Sort",

and pressed the

[START] key, you must

touch the [READ-END]

key after all pages of the

original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)

NOTE

If the auto paper select display does not appear, a

tray with the correct size of paper for the selected

ratio will not be automatically selected.

To return the ratio to 100%

To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [COPY

RATIO] key to display the ratio menu and then touch

the [100%] key. (Steps 2 and 3 on page 4-16.)

ORIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO

8 x11

PAPER SELECT

64%

COPY RATIO

LOGOUT

Copy_SEC.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-18

XY ZOOM

The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately. The ratios can be set

from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.

Example: Selecting 100% for the length and 50% for the width

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.

Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.

Touch the [X] key.

The initial state of the [X]

key is selected

(highlighted), so this

step normally is not

necessary. Touch the [X]

key only if it is not

highlighted yet.

Use the reduction, enlargement, and

ZOOM ([ ], [ ]) keys to change the

copy ratio in the horizontal (X) direction.

A fixed ratio key will not

become highlighted

when touched.

Zoom ratios: Any ratio

from 25% to 400% can

be set in 1% increments.

Touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio, or the

[ ] key to decrease

the ratio. (If you continue

to touch the [ ]/[ ] key, the ratio will change

automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will

change rapidly.)

Touch the [Y] key.

Original

Copy

NOTE

When the original is placed in the document feeder,

the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.

AUTO

100%

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

100

NOTES

● Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the

approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to

increase the ratio or the [ ] key to decrease the

ratio.

● Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key

is continuously touched can be disabled in the

administrator settings (see "Key operation setting

(prohibit key repeat)” on page 10 of the

administrator settings guide).

XY ZOOM

ZOOM

50%

10Y

64%

ZOOM

100

ZOOM

100Y

Copy_SEC.book 18 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM

4-19

Use the reduction, enlargement, and

ZOOM ([ ], [ ]) keys to change the

copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.

A fixed ratio key will not

become highlighted

when touched.

The zoom keys can be

used to change the ratio

from 25% to 400% in

increments of 1%.

If needed, you can touch

the [X] key once again to

readjust the X zoom.

Touch the [OK] key.

If needed, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key

and select the paper size.

If the AUTO PAPER

SELECT mode is on, the

appropriate copy paper

size will have been

automatically selected

based on the original

size and selected copy

ratios.

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

ZOOM

50%

70Y

64%

77%

XY ZOOM

CANCEL

ZOOM

77Y

400%

200%

100%

129%

AUTO

ORIGINAL

AUTO

EXPOSURE

PAPER SELECT

X-50% Y-70%

COPY RATIO

PLAIN

To cancel an X or Y zoom setting...

Touch the [XY ZOOM] key or the [CANCEL] key in

the ratio selection screen (step 3 on page 4-18 or

step 7 ).

04.fm 19 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時２６分

4-20

SPECIAL PAPERS

The tray 2 and the bypass tray on the optional duplex module with bypass tray can be used to make copies on

transparencies, postcards, label sheets, envelopes*

, and plain paper.

*1 Envelopes can be placed in the tray 2.

Place the original in the document feeder

tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3

to 4-6)

Load the special paper in the bypass tray.

Place the paper with the

printed side face down.

See page 2-3 for the

specifications of paper

that can be used in the

bypass tray.

For the paper loading

instructions, see

"Loading paper in the

bypass tray" (page 3-3).

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.

Set the type and size of paper loaded in the

bypass tray.

(1)The (X) key shows

the currently selected

paper type.

(2)The (Y) key shows

the size of paper

loaded in the bypass

tray.

(3)To change the displayed paper type, touch the

(X) key before touching the (Y) key. When

loading paper, if you changed the paper size

from an inch size to an AB size (or from an AB

size to an inch size), or if you changed the paper

type, be sure to change the paper type and size

settings as explained in steps 5 to 6 on page 2-

5, and steps 7 to 10 on page 2-6.

Select the bypass tray.

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

When copying from the

document glass in the

sort mode using the

[START] key, touch the

[READ-END] key after

all originals have been

scanned (step 7 on page

4-12).

AUTO

100%

8 x11

PAPER SELECT

COPY

EXPOSURE

(X) (Y)

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY

PLAIN

8 x11

11x17

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY

PLAIN

8 x11

11x17

Copy_SEC.book 20 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

5-1

CHAPTER 5

CONVENIENT COPY

FUNCTIONS

This chapter explains special-purpose functions, storing of copy

settings, and other convenient functions. Please select and read

sections of this chapter as needed.

Page

SPECIAL MODES................................................................................... 5-2

●

General procedure for using special functions................................ 5-2

●

Margin shift...................................................................................... 5-3

●

Erase............................................................................................... 5-4

●

Dual page copy ............................................................................... 5-5

●

Pamphlet copy................................................................................. 5-6

●

Job build.......................................................................................... 5-8

●

Tandem copy................................................................................... 5-10

●

Covers/inserts ................................................................................. 5-12

●

Transparency film with insert sheets ............................................... 5-23

●

Multi shot......................................................................................... 5-24

●

Book copy ....................................................................................... 5-26

●

Card shot......................................................................................... 5-27

●

Mirror image.................................................................................... 5-29

●

B/W reverse..................................................................................... 5-29

●

Print menu....................................................................................... 5-30

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS......................... 5-42

●

Storing a job program...................................................................... 5-42

●

Calling up a job program ................................................................. 5-43

●

Deleting a stored job program......................................................... 5-43

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN .............................................................. 5-44

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

5-2

SPECIAL MODES

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode to open the special modes screen. The following

functions can be selected in the special modes screen.

(1) Margin shift (page 5-3)

(2) Erase (page 5-4)

(3) Dual page copy (page 5-5)

(4) Pamphlet copy (page 5-6)

(5) Job build (page 5-8)

(6) Tandem copy (page 5-10)

(7) [OK] key on the special modes screen

Touch the [OK] key to return to the main screen of

copy mode.

(8) / key

Touch these keys to change the special modes

screen.

There are three special modes screens.

Touch the key to change to the other two screens.

●The following special functions can be selected in the 2nd screen (2/3).

Covers/inserts (page 5-12)

Transparency inserts (page 5-23)

Multi shot (page 5-24)

Book copy (page 5-26)

Card shot (page 5-27)

Mirror image (page 5-29)

●The following special functions can be selected in the 3rd screen (3/3).

B/W reverse (page 5-29) Print menu (page 5-30)

General procedure for using special functions

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.

Touch the key for the desired special

mode.

Example:

Selecting the margin

shift function

To select a special function in one of the other two

screens, use the / keys to change the

screen.

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

QUICK FILE

FILE

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

AUTO

100%

AUTO

AUTO 8 x11

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

PAPER

COPY RATIO

ORIGINAL

8 x11

8 x14

11x17

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key

in the main screen.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4) (5) (7)(6) (8)

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

Setting procedures for modes requiring setting

screens start on the next page.

The dual page copy, job build, tandem copy,

mirror image and B/W reverse functions do not

require setting screens.

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-3

Margin shift

The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 1/2" (10 mm) in

its initial setting.

This function is convenient when stapling or binding copies with a string.

Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the

special modes screen.

The margin shift setting

screen will appear.

The margin shift icon

( ) will also appear in

the upper left of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned on.

Select the shift direction.

Touch a shift direction

key to select right or left.

The selected key will be

highlighted.

Set the shift amount as needed and touch

the [OK] key.

Use the and the

keys to set the shift

amount. The shift

amount can be set from

0" to 1" in 1/8" (0 to 20

mm in 1 mm)

increments.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

NOTES

● The initial setting for the margin width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 1" (0

to 20 mm). (Page 17 of the administrator settings guide)

● When margin shift is selected, rotating copying will not operate even if the condition for rotate copying is met.

Image shifted

to the right

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

Original

Two-sided copying

Image shifted

to the right

Margin

Image shifted

to the left

Margin

One-sided copying

Original

●The shift direction can be selected from right or left

shift as shown in the illustration.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

RIGHT

LEFT

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the margin shift function, touch the

[CANCEL] key on the margin shift setting screen

(step 3).

SIDE 1

(0 1)

inch

(0 1)

inch

SIDE 2

OKCANCEL

1/2 1/2

Copy_SEC.book 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-4

Erase

The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The

erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 1/2" (10 mm) in it's initial

setting.

EDGE ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of

copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used

as an original.

CENTER ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings

of bound documents.

EDGE + CENTER ERASE

Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies

and eliminates the shadow at the center of copies.

Touch the [ERASE] key on the special

modes screen.

The erase setting screen

will appear.

The erase icon ( ) will

also appear in the upper

left of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

Select the desired erase mode.

Select one of the three

erase modes. The

selected key will be

highlighted.

Adjust the amount of erase and touch the

[OK] key.

Use the and keys

to set the erase width to

any value from 0" to 1" in

increments of 1/8" (0 to

10 mm in 1 mm).

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

NOTE

The initial setting for the erasure width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 1" (0

to 20 mm). (Page 17 of the administrator settings guide)

Original Copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

MODES

RGIN SHIFT

PHLET COPY

ERASE

DUAL

JOB

BUILD

TAN

EDGE

ERASE

CENTER

ERASE

EDGE+CENTER

ERASE

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

NOTE

When erase is used, edge erase takes place at the

edges of the original image. If you also use a ratio

setting, the edge erase width will change according

to the set ratio.

To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL]

key on the erase setting screen (step 3).

EDGE

CANCEL OK

1/2

(0 1)

inch

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-5

Dual page copy

The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass.

This function is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.

[Example] Copying right and left pages of a book

Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

The [DUAL PAGE

COPY] key will be

highlighted to indicate

that the function is

turned on, and the dual

page copy icon ( ) will

appear in the upper left

of the screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Place the originals on the document glass.

When copying a thick

book, press down lightly

on the book to flatten it

against the document

glass.

Place the opened original on the document glass so

that the first page you wish to copy is on the right and

the center of the original is aligned with the size mark.

Ensure that 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper is

selected.

If 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size

paper is not selected,

touch the [PAPER

SELECT] key to select

8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size

paper.

●The dual page copy function can be used only

when copying from the document glass. The

automatic document feeder cannot be used with

this function.

●Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) paper can be used.

Book original Dual page copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

RASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

Index

11" x 17"

Center line of

original

This page

is copied

first.

8 " x 11"

8 "

x 11"

(A4) (A3)

About the steps that follow

For two-sided copying, follow steps 2 through 4

on page 4-13 and then follow steps 4 through 6

on page 4-12.

For one-sided copying, follow steps 4 through 6

on page 4-12.

NOTE

To erase shadows caused by document binding, use

the edge erase function (page 5-4). (Center Erase

and Edge + Center Erase cannot be used in

combination.)

To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the

[DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the special modes

screen (screen of step 1).

AUTO

100%

8 x11

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-6

Pamphlet copy

The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual center-stapling and folding into a

booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet.

This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.

[Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode

● When using this function, a duplex module must

be installed.

● Scan the originals from the first page to the last

page. The order of copying will be automatically

adjusted by the machine.

● Either left binding (right to left turning) or right

binding (left to right turning) can be selected.

●

Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.

Blank pages may be automatically produced at

the end depending on the number of the originals.

● If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can

be stapled in two positions along the center of

copies and folded at the center.

Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

The PAMPHLET COPY

setting screen will

appear. The pamphlet

copy icon ( , etc.) will

also appear in the upper

left corner of the screen

to indicate that the

function is turned on.

Designate the type of originals to be

copied: 1-sided or 2-sided.

Select the [2-SIDED] key

if you wish to scan a two-

sided original using the

automatic document

feeder.

Select the binding position (left binding or

right binding).

If you wish to insert a different type of paper for use as

a cover, follow steps 4 through 12 below.

If you do not wish to insert paper for a cover, continue

from step 8 on the next page.

Touch the [COVER SETTING] key.

NOTE

To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function (page 5-26). The book copy

function scans the opened original in two-page units. (Two pages are scanned at each scan, reducing the number

of repetitions of the scanning operation by a half.)

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Originals

(one-sided)

Originals

(two-sided)

Left binding

Right binding

First page

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

MARGIN SHIFT

PAMPHLET COPY

ERASE

JOB

BUILD

2-SIDED

ORIGINAL

1-SIDED

RIGHT

BINDING

LEFT

BINDING

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

Copy_SEC.book 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-7

Select whether or not you wish to copy on

the cover ("YES" or "NO").

Select the paper tray for the cover.

(1)The currently selected

paper tray for the

cover is displayed.

(2)The size and type of

paper in the currently

selected tray is

displayed.

In the example screen above, 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

size plain paper is loaded.

To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the tray

selection key. (In the screen example, the " TRAY2"

display is the tray selection key.)

The tray selection screen appears when the tray

selection key is touched. Select the desired tray in

this screen.

Touch the [OK] key.

Return to the main

screen of copy mode.

Place the original in the document feeder

or on the document glass. (page 4-3)

Ensure that the desired paper size has

been automatically selected based on the

original size.

To select another size

paper, select the desired

size and touch the

[AUTO IMAGE] key. The

appropriate copy ratio

will be selected

automatically based on

the original size and the paper size. (See steps 2

and 3 on page 4-15.)

Select any desired copy settings such as

the exposure or number of copies, and

then press the [START] key.

[When using the automatic document

feeder:]

Copying will start after all originals have been

scanned. (The next step is not needed.)

[When using the document glass:]

Replace the original with the next original and

press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until

all originals have been scanned and then touch

the [READ-END] key.

NOTES

● Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets,

and transparency film. When copying on a cover,

do not select a tray that has one of these types of

paper.

● Select the same size of paper for the covers as for

the copies.

PRINT ON COVER

YES

CANCEL OK

TRAY2

PAPER TRAY

8 x11

PLAIN

(1)

(2)

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

CANCEL

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

LEFT

BINDING

NOTES

● When the pamphlet copy function is set, the two-

sided copying mode will be automatically selected.

● If this function is used in combination with the

pamphlet copy function (pamphlet stapling) and

the number of original pages exceeds the number

of pages that can be stapled, a message asking

you to select "CANCEL", "CONTINUE", or

"DIVIDE" will appear.

To cancel the job, select "CANCEL". To make

pamphlet copies without stapling, select

"CONTINUE". To divide the pages into sets that

can be stapled, select "DIVIDE".

If you performed steps 4 to 6 to insert cover paper,

divided stapling is not possible. You can either

continue pamphlet copying without stapling, or

cancel the job.

To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the

[CANCEL] key on the pamphlet copy setting screen

(step 7).

AUTO

100%

11x17

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-8

Job build

Use job build mode when you need to copy more originals than can be placed in the document feeder at once. The

maximum number of originals that can be placed in the document feeder at once is 50 sheets (30 sheets when the

size is B4 or larger; for more information see "Acceptable originals" on page 4-2). This function lets you divide and

scan the originals in sets. This function allows the original pages to be scanned in sets.

[Example] Copying 100 pages of 8-1/2" x 11" originals

Touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the special

modes screen.

The [JOB BUILD] key

will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the job

build icon (

)

will

appear in the upper left

of the screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

Return to the main

screen of copy mode.

Place the first set of originals in the

document feeder tray. (page 4-3)

Make sure that the desired paper size is

selected, select the number of copies or

other copy settings, and press the

[START] key.

Scanning of originals will

start. After scanning of

the first set of originals (A

in the example above) is

completed, remove the

scanned originals, place

the next set of originals

(set B in the example) and press the [START] key.

Repeat this operation until all sets of originals have

been scanned.

If you wish to adjust the copy settings each time

you place a set of originals, see "Changing the

copy settings for each set of originals" on the next

page.

Touch the [READ-END] key.

Originals

*Divide the originals into sets of 50 pages each.

Scan the originals starting from the first page of set

A. Scan set B next, taking care to keep the correct

page order.

A:50 sheets B:50 sheets

100 original pages

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

N SHIFT

LET COPY

ERASE

DUAL

COP

JOB

BUILD

TANDE

COPY

RASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB

BUILD] key on the special modes screen (step 1).

The highlighted display will be canceled.

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,

PRESS [CHANGE].

INTERRUPT

CHANGE

11x17

ORIGINAL

8 x11

Copy_SEC.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-9

■ Changing the copy settings for each set of originals

When using job build mode, you can change the copy settings each time you place a set of originals.

After performing step 4 on page 5-8, follow the steps below.

Touch the [CHANGE] key.

Select the desired copy settings in the

screen that appears and press the

[START] key.

The copy settings that

can be selected are

"EXPOSURE", "PAPER

SELECT", and "COPY

RATIO".

If you touch the [READ-

END] key now, copying

will begin without

scanning the new set of

originals.

Touch the [READ-END] key.

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,

PRESS [CHANGE].

INTERRUPT

CHANGE

11x17

ORIGINAL

8 x11

READ-END

INTERRUPT

11x17

COPY RATIO

[START].

8 x14

x11

8 x11

EXPOSURE

PAPER SELECT

100%

AUTO

8 x11

ORIGINAL

8 x11

READ-END

PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].

TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,

PRESS [CHANGE].

INTERRUPT

CHANGE

11x17

ORIGINAL

8 x11

NOTES

● If the original size was set manually at the beginning of the job build procedure, it will not be possible to change

the original size setting. If the automatic original detection function is operating, the original size will be detected

for each set of originals placed.

● When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type.

● If "XY ZOOM" was initially set for the ratio, it will not be possible to change the ratio setting.

● When job build mode is used in combination with any of the following functions, the [CHANGE] key will not

appear in the screen of step 5.

Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, staple sort, saddle

stitch

Copy_SEC.book 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-10

Tandem copy

This function can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the network function has been added.

Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.

By dividing the job in half, approximately half the time is required to complete the job.

To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network as network printers. Even if more machines are

connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.

Server machine and client machine

●In the following explanations, the machine on which

the copy job is initially set up and tandem copy

selected is called the server machine. The other

machine that is asked to share the job is called the

client machine.

●To use the tandem copy function, the tandem

settings must be configured in the administrator

settings. (See page 13 of the administrator settings

giude)

●When configuring the tandem settings in the server

machine, the IP address of the client machine must

be entered. For the port number, it is best to use the

initial setting (50001). Unless you experience

difficulty with this setting, do not change it. The

tandem settings should be configured by your

network administrator. If the server and client

machines will alternate server and client roles, the IP

address of the server machine must also be entered

in the client machine. The same port number can be

set in both machines.

Touch the [TANDEM COPY] key on the

special modes screen.

The [TANDEM COPY]

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

tandem copy icon ( )

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the

main screen of copy

mode.

Set the number of copies with the numeric

keys.

Up to 999 copies can be

set. When the [START]

key is pressed, the

copies will automatically

be divided between the

server and client

machines. If an odd

number of copies is set, the server machine will

make the extra set.

Place the original in the document feeder

or on the document glass. (page 4-3)

100 sets of copies

50 sets of copies

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

ERASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

RASE

1/3

DUAL PAGE

COPY

JOB

BUILD

TANDEM

COPY

If an incorrect number of copies is set...

Press the clear key and set the correct number of

copies.

LOGOUT

Copy_SEC.book 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-11

Press the [START] key.

NOTES

● To perform tandem copying, the server machine and client machine must meet certain conditions.

After the [START] key is pressed on the server machine, the server machine verifies that the conditions have

been met. If the conditions have not been met, tandem copying does not begin and "TANDEM OUTPUT IS

NOT ALLOWED. OUTPUT ALL SETS USING MASTER MACHINE?" appears in the display. To have the server

machine make all the copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [CANCEL] key.

• As an example, the following conditions must be met when a staple finisher is installed on the server machine

and not on the client machine:

(1) If tandem copying is executed for a two-sided copy job with the number of copies set to 999 and "Non-

staple" is selected, tandem copying will take place.

(2) If tandem copying is executed for a two-sided copy job with the number of copies set to 999 and

"Staple" is selected, tandem copying will not take place because the client machine does not have a

finisher.

● After the [START] key is pressed, if the client machine cannot print because it is out of paper or other reason,

the server machine will print its half of the job. The other half of the job will be stored in the client machine and

the job will be printed when the client machine is able to print.

● If auditing mode is enabled on both the server and client machines, the same account number must be entered

on both machines.

● If auditing mode is enabled on the client machine but not on the server machine, tandem copying cannot be

performed.

To cancel the tandem copy function, touch the

[TANDEM COPY] key on the special modes screen

(step 1). The highlighted display will be canceled.

Copy_SEC.book 11 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-12

Covers/inserts

A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the

automatic document feeder is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at

specified pages.

● Covers/inserts can be disabled in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).

Example of adding covers

Example of adding covers and inserts

Example of adding inserts

About the explanations of covers and

inserts

There are various ways of using covers and inserts.

To keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts

are explained separately. The procedure for

inserting covers is explained on page 5-13. The

procedure for adding inserts is explained on page 5-

14. After reading these explanations, see the

examples of using covers and inserts on pages 5-

17 to 5-22.

■ Preparations for using covers and inserts

● Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.

● Use the same size of paper for the covers/inserts as for the copies. (For the procedures for loading paper, see

pages 2-2 to 2-7.)

● Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder, select one-sided or two-

sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings as explained on pages 4-

7 to 4-10. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts on the

following page.

● The original must be scanned from the document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.

● Up to 100 covers/inserts can be inserted. Two covers/inserts cannot be inserted between the same pages.

● Pamphlet copying cannot be used in combination with covers/inserts.

● When performing two-sided copying of two-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and

back sides of an original page.

Front cover

Back cover

Originals

Inserts

Front

cover

Back

cover

Originals

Inserts

Copy_SEC.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-13

■ Procedure for inserting front and back cover paper

The paper for the front cover is called the front cover paper ("FRONT COVER" in the touch panel). The paper

for the back cover is called the back cover paper ("BACK COVER" in the touch panel).

●Examples of insertion methods for the front and back cover paper are given on pages 5-18 to 5-21.

Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

Select the tray used for the front cover

paper.

(1)The tray name (tray position) selected for the

front cover paper and the paper size and type

are shown in (X). If the tray in which you

loaded paper for the front cover is shown, touch

the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of

step 2.

(2)If the correct tray for the cover sheet paper does

not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray

selection screen will appear. Select the tray in

which you loaded paper for the front cover. You

will return to the screen of above.

Touch the [FRONT COVER] key in the

screen of step 2.

Set the insertion conditions for the front

cover paper.

(1)Select whether or not the front cover paper is to be

copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).

(2)Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided

copying is to be performed on the front cover

paper with the (Y) keys. This selection is only

possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been

selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection

made here only applies to the front cover paper.

When the back cover paper is selected, the

selection only applies to the back cover paper.)

(3)The (Z) key shows the tray selected for the front

cover paper in step 3 and the paper size and

type.

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[FRONT COVER] key will be highlighted.

To insert back cover paper, repeat steps 2

through 6, using the [BACK COVER] key

instead of the [FRONT COVER] key.

Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the

screen of step 7 to display a list of the

selected settings (page 5-16).

To exit the cover/insert settings, touch the

upper [OK] key in the screen of step 7.

Press the [START] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

CARD SHOTBOOK COPY

FRONT COVER

BACK COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

CANCEL OK

INSERTION

SETTINGS

COVERS/INSERTS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

8 x11

PLAIN

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

FRONT COVER

TRAY2 TRAY2TRAY2 TRAY2 TRAY2

BACK COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

8 x11

PLAIN

8 x11

PLAIN

8 x11

PLAIN

(X) (Y)

To cancel covers/inserts settings...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.

PLEASE SET UP A FRONT COVER.

FRONT COVER SETTING

PRINT ON FRONT COVER

YES NO

1-SIDED 2-SIDED

CANCEL

PAPER TRAY

TRAY2

8 x11

PLAIN

(X)

(Y)

(Z)

PLEASE SET UP COVERS/INSERTS.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

FRONT COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTINGS

BACK COVER

CANCEL

Copy_SEC.book 13 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-14

■ Procedure for adding inserts

You can have different paper automatically inserted as an insert at a specified pages. Two types of insert paper

can be used. These are specified with the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key and [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING] in the touch panel.

●Examples of insertion methods for insert paper are given on page 5-22.

Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

Select the tray used for insertion type A.

(1)The tray name (tray position) selected for

insertion type A and the paper size and type are

shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded

paper for insertion type A is shown, touch the

[OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2.

(2)If the correct tray for insertion type A does not

appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray

selection screen will appear. Select the tray in

which you loaded paper for insertion type A.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]

key in the screen of step 2

Set the insertion conditions for insertion

type A .

(1)Select whether or not insertion type A paper is

to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or

[NO]).

(2)Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided

copying is to be performed on insertion type A

with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible

when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected.

(The one-sided/two-sided selection made here

only applies to insertion type A paper. When

insertion type B is selected, the selection only

applies to insertion type B paper.) The [2-SIDED]

key appears when the duplex module is installed.

(3)The (Z) key shows the tray selected for

insertion type A in step 3 and the paper size

and type.

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

When you return to the screen of step 2, the

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be

highlighted.

If you wish to insert a different paper with

the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,

repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,

and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

CARD SHOTBOOK COPY

FRONT COVER

BACK COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

CANCEL OK

INSERTION

SETTINGS

COVERS/INSERTS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

FRONT COVER

TRAY2 TRAY2 TRAY2 TRAY2

BACK COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

8 x11

PLAIN

8 x11

PLAIN

8 x11

PLAIN

8 x11

PLAIN

(X) (Y)

INSERTION TYPE A SETTING

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

YES NO

1-SIDED 2-SIDED

CANCEL

PAPER TRAY

8 x11

PLAIN

TRAY2

(X)

(Y)

(Z)

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

CANCEL

Copy_SEC.book 14 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-15

Touch the [INSERTION SETTINGS] key to

specify the pages where you wish to insert

the insert papers of [INSERTION TYPE A

SETTING] and [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING].

Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A] key or the

[INSERTION TYPE B] key, enter the page

number where you wish to insert the insert

paper with the numeric keys, and then

touch the [ENTER] key.

(1)(X) shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100

inserts can be added. When inserting multiple

inserts, touch the [ENTER] key after each entry

of an insertion page number (insertion position)

with the numeric keys.

(2)(Y) shows the tray selected in step 3 for

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and the paper

size and type.

(3)(Z) shows the tray selected in step 3 for

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] and the paper

size and type.

(4)When the [INSERTION TYPE A] key is

highlighted, the insert settings apply to

[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]. When the

[INSERTION TYPE B] key is highlighted, the

insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE B

SETTING].

Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 9.

You will return to the screen of step 2.

If you wish to insert a different paper with

the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,

repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the

[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,

and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead

of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.

Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the

screen of step 11 to display a list of the

selected settings (page 5-16).

To exit the cover/insert settings, touch the

upper [OK] key in the screen of step 11.

Press the [START] key.

INSERTION

SETTINGS

RTION

SETTING

TION

SETTING

CANCE

INSERTION SETTINGS

INPUT THE PAGE NUMBER AND

PRESS [ENTER]. USE [C] KEY TO AMEND.

INSERTION

TOTAL:0

ENTER

8 x11

PLAIN

INSERTION PAGE

TRAY2 TRAY2

8 x11

PLAIN

8 x11

PLAIN

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

(X) (Y) (Z)

To cancel covers/inserts settings...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

CANCEL

Copy_SEC.book 15 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-16

■ Checking, editing, and deleting cover/insert pages

The [PAGE LAYOUT] key appears after covers/inserts settings are configured (the settings of step 1 through

step 7 on pages 5-13 and 5-14).

The [PAGE LAYOUT] key is used for the following:

● To display the status of covers/inserts pages

● To edit, delete, or add inserted pages

Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key.

The set covers/inserts pages are shown.

(1)If there are multiple screens, touch the or

key to change screens.

(2)Displayed icons:

: Front side copy only

: Back side copy only

: Two-sided copy

: No copying

For inserts, the insertion page also appears.

" " represents a page number.

/- : Front side copy only at page

/ : Two-sided copy at page /

< : Insert non-copied insert at page

(3)To edit or delete the insertion page of an insert,

touch the key of the insert that you wish to edit

or delete in the page layout screen. When the

key is touched, the [CANCEL], [DELETE], or

[AMEND] keys appear.

●To cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key.

●To delete an inserted page, touch the

[DELETE] key.

●To edit an inserted page, touch the [AMEND]

key. The screen of step 9 on page 5-15

appears. Edit the insertion page in the screen

that appears.

(4)To edit or delete a cover page, touch the [BACK

COVER] key in the page layout screen. The

screen of step 5 on page 5-13 will appear. Edit

or delete the cover page in this screen.

When you have finished checking the

pages, touch the [OK] key.

To display the [PAGE LAYOUT] key...

Configure the settings in step 1 through step 7

on pages 5-13 and 5-14.

INSERTION

TYPE A SETTING

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

PAGE LAYOUT

INSERTION

SETTINGS

INSERTION

TYPE B SETTING

CANCEL

PAGE LAYOUT

FRONT COVER

INSERTION

TYPE A

INSERTION

TYPE B

7/8

INSERTION

TYPE A

12/-

1/2

AMEND THE INSERTION?

CANCEL DELETE AMEND

INSERTION

TYPE A

1/2

Copy_SEC.book 16 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-17

■ Examples of covers and inserts

The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the

following pages.

Covers

●One-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-18)

●One-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-20)

●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-19)

●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-21)

Inserts

●One-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-22)

●One-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-22)

●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals

(page 5-22)

●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals

(page 5-22)

■ Symbols used for covers and inserts

The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.

The numbers that appear indicate relations between the originals and copies, and will vary depending on the

settings.

Type

Symbol Meaning

Icon

appearing

in display

Type

Symbol Meaning

Icon

appearing

in display

Front cover

Front cover when not

copied on.

Inserts

Insert when not copied on.

Front cover after one-sided

copying.

Insert after one-sided

copying.

Front cover after one-sided

copying of a two-sided

original. (One page is not

copied on.)

Insert after one-sided

copying of a two-sided

original. (One page is not

copied on.)

Front cover after two-sided

copying.

Insert after two-sided

copying.

Back cover

Back cover when not

copied on.

Other

One-sided original or

output page of regular one-

sided copying

Back cover after one-sided

copying of one-sided

original.

Two-sided original or

output page of regular two-

sided copying.

Back cover after one-sided

copying of a two-sided

original. (One page is not

copied on.)

One-sided original or

output page of regular one-

sided copying.

Back cover after two-sided

copying.

Two-sided copy when only

one side is copied on due

to insufficient originals.

5 5

Copy_SEC.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-18

■ Covers (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)

One-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

2 3 4 5 6

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

2 3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

2 3 4 5

2 3 4

2 3 4 5

2 3 4

3 4 5

3 4

Copy_SEC.book 18 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-19

■ Covers (Two-sided copying of one-sided originals)

Two-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

2 3 4 5 6

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

1 2

Copy_SEC.book 19 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-20

■ Covers (One-sided copying of Two-sided originals)

One-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

2 3 4 5 6

3 4 5 6

2 3 4 5

2 3 4

2 3 4 5

2 3 4

3 4 5

3 4

Copy_SEC.book 20 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-21

■ Covers (Two-sided copying of two-sided originals)

Two-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

Copying on cover

Resulting copies

Front cover Back cover

No copying No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

No copying

One-sided

copying

No copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

Copy_SEC.book 21 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-22

■ Inserts (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)

One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following one-sided originals. The insertion page of

the insert is set to page 3.

■ Inserts (One-sided copying of two-sided originals)

One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following two-sided originals. The insertion page of

the insert is set to page 3

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page

2 3 4 5 6

Copying on

insert

Resulting copies (one-sided copying)

Resulting copies

(two-sided copying)

No copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

2 3 4 5 6

4 5 6

3 4

5 6

1st page 2nd page 3rd page

Copying on

insert

Resulting copies (one-sided copying)

Resulting copies

(two-sided copying)

No copying

One-sided

copying

Two-sided

copying

2 3 4 5 6

4 5 6

3 5

5 6

Copy_SEC.book 22 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-23

Transparency film with insert sheets

When copying onto transparency film, blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets.

●

This function only operates in "one-sided to one-

sided" and "two-sided to one-sided" modes.

● Multiple copies cannot be selected in this mode.

●

The inserts are inserted under each transparency

as shown at left.

●

Select insert paper that is the same size as the

transparencies.

● Transparencies can be fed from the tray 2 or

bypass tray.

●

If the transparencies are loaded in tray 2, be sure

to set the paper size and paper type as explained

on pages 2-5 and 2-6.

Load transparency film into the tray 2.

Remove any paper

already in the tray 2

before loading the

transparency film. (To

load paper in the tray 2,

see pages 2-6 and 2-7.)

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The system settings

menu screen will

appear.

Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.

The paper tray selection

screen will appear.

Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.

Touch the key to display the tray

settings screen of tray 2.

Touch the [TYPE/SIZE] key.

Touch the [TRANSPARENCY] key.

Touch the [OK] key.

If the paper size was changed from an inch size to an

AB size, or from an AB size to an inch size, be sure

to set the paper type and size as explained on steps

5 to 6 on page

2-5

and steps 7 to 10 on page

2-6

Insert sheets

Example: Inserting insert sheets between transparencies

Originals (1-sided)

Originals (2-sided)

Two-sided originals are only

supported when automatic

document feeder is used.

Inserts can also be

copied on.

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY

SETTINGS

ATA

ORWARD

RINT

PRINTER

CONDITION

SYSTEM SETTINGS

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TRAY SETTINGS

1/8

PLAIN / 8 x11

PAPER TRAY SETTINGS

TYPE / SIZE

SYSTEM SETTINGS

TRAY 1

FAX

I-FAX

COPY

DOC.

FILING

FIXED PAPER SIDE

DISABLE DUPLEX

DISABLE STAPLE

DISABLE PUNCH

TYPE / SIZE

TRAY 2

PER TRAY SETTINGS

COPY

I-FAX

DOC.

FILING

FAX

PLAIN / 8 x11

HEAVY PAPER

TYPE.

LETTER HEAD

LABELSPRE-PUNCHED

COLOR

TRANSPARENCY

TYPE OK

SIZE

AUTO-INCH

AUTO-AB

SIZE INPUT

8 X11,8 X11R

A4,A4R,B5,B5R

JAPANESE P/C

X420 Y297

SETTING

NON STANDARD

SIZE

2/2

Copy_SEC.book 23 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-24

Select the tray 2.

Touch the [TRANSPARENCY INSERTS]

key in the special modes screen (2nd

screen).

The Transparency inserts

setting screen will appear.

The transparency inserts

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

Set the insertion conditions for the insert

paper.

(1) Select whether or not the insert paper will be

copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).

(2) The (Y) key shows the tray selected for the insert

paper and the paper size and type. To select a

different tray, touch this key to display the tray

selection screen and select the tray that has the

insert paper.

Touch the outer [OK] key in the screen of

step 7.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Multi shot

Multiple original pages can be copied onto one sheet of copy paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two

original pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when

you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.

[Example] Copying 4 original pages onto one sheet of paper

(Page number : 4in1, layout : left top : right top (see the next page))

● When using the multi shot function, place the

originals, select the desired paper size, and

select the copying mode before selecting the

multi shot function on the special modes screen.

● When using the multi shot function, the

appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set

based on the original size, paper size, and the

number of originals to be copied onto one sheet.

The minimum reduction ratio is 25%. The

original size, copy paper size, and selected

number of original pages may require that the

ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take

place at 25% in this case, part of the original

images may be cut off.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

OR COPY.

1. 8 x11

2. 8 x11

3. 11x17

4. 8 x11

PLAIN

TRANSPARENCY

PLAIN

AUTO

AUT

ORIGIN

EXPOS

PAPE

100

COPY R

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

CARD SHOTBOOK COPY

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass

is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13.

To cancel the Transparency film with insert sheets

function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the

Transparency film with insert sheets setting screen.

PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS

YES NO

CANCEL

INSERTION SHEET

TRAY5

8 x11

PLAIN

(X) (Y)

One-sided copies from

one-sided originals

One-sided copies from

two-sided originals

Copies

Copy_SEC.book 24 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-25

Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The MULTI SHOT setting

screen will appear.

A multi shot icon ( ,

etc.) will also appear in

the upper left of the

screen to indicate that

the function is turned on.

Select the number of images to be copied

onto one sheet of copy paper.

If needed, the

orientation of the copy

paper and the

orientation of the images

will be rotated.

Select the layout.

Select the order in which

the originals will be

arranged on the copy.

The arrows in the above diagram indicate the

directions in which the images are arranged.

Touch the [OK] key (inside [OK] key) on

the multi shot setting screen.

You will return to the special modes screen.

Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

MULTI SHOT

MIRROR

IMAGE

CARD SHOT

SPECIAL MODES

MULTI SHOT

2in1 4in1

LAYOUT

CANCEL OK

2in1

4in1

Shot number

Layout

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used, see

pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is

being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13.

To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL]

key in the multi shot setting screen (the screen of step

2).

Copy_SEC.book 25 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-26

Book copy

This function is convenient when you wish to compile copies of books or other bound originals into an attractive

pamphlet format. The two pages of the open book are scanned as a set, and two pages each are copied onto the

front and back sides of the copy paper (four pages are copied onto one sheet of copy paper). This allows the copies

to be folded down the center and made into a pamphlet.

[Example] Book copying an 8-page pamphlet

● When using this function, a duplex module must

be installed.

● Scan the originals from the first page to the last

page. The order of copying will be automatically

adjusted by the machine.

● Either left binding (right to left turning) or right

binding (left to right turning) can be selected.

●

Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.

Blank pages may be automatically produced at

the end depending on the number of the originals.

● If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, book copy

can be used in combination with the pamphlet

function to staple and fold the copies at the

centerline.

Touch the [BOOK COPY] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The BOOK COPY

setting screen will

appear. The book copy

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the function

is turned on.

Select whether the book opens to the left or

to the right, and touch the [OK] key in the

book copy setting screen.

You will return to the

special modes screen.

Select any desired cover settings.

If you wish to use a

different type of paper for

the cover, perform steps

4 to 12 on pages 5-6 to 5-

If you do not wish to use

a different type of paper,

continue from step 4.

Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Place the originals on the document glass.

(page 4-3)

Scan the original pages in

the following order:

Opened front and back

cover

Opened inside of front

cover and 1st page

Opened 2nd and 3rd page

Opened last page and

inside of back cover

Make sure that the desired paper size has

been selected.

If the desired paper size

is not selected, select

the desired size.

Select the number of copies and any other

desired copy settings, and then press the

[START] key.

Place the next two pages and press the

[START] key. Repeat until all pages have

been scanned, and then touch the [READ-

END] key.

Finished copies are

folded in two.

Originals

Left binding

Right binding

First page

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

SPECIAL MODES

COVERS/INSERTS

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

CARD SHOTBOOK COPY

RIGHT

BINDING

SET

LEFT

BINDING

CANCEL OK

RIGHT

BINDING

COVER

SETTING

When book copy is selected, two-sided

copying is automatically selected.

To cancel the book copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key

in the book copy setting screen (the screen of step 2).

AUTO

100%

11x17

PAPER SELECT

COPY RATIO

EXPOSURE

Copy_SEC.book 26 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-27

Card shot

When copying a card, this function allows you to combine the front and back sides on a single sheet of paper.

This function is convenient for making copies for certification purposes and helps save paper.

● Copying is only possible on standard size paper.

● A copy ratio cannot be selected when using this

function.

● The image cannot be rotated when using this

function.

Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then

select the desired paper size.

The selected paper size

key is highlighted and

the paper selection

screen closes.

Touch the [CARD SHOT] key in the special

modes screen (2nd screen).

The CARD SHOT

setting screen will

appear. A card shot

icon ( , etc.) will also

appear in the upper left

corner of the screen to

indicate that the

function is turned on.

Enter the X dimension (width) and Y

dimension (length) of the original with the

keys.

●X (width) is initially selected. Enter X and then

touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y.

●To return the X and Y values to the initial

settings configured in the administrator

settings, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. (See

"CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on page 17 of the

administrator settings guide).

●To have the images enlarged or reduced by a

suitable ratio based on the entered original

size so that the front and back sides fit into the

selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]

key.

Original

Example:

Portrait

8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

size

Example:

Landscape

8-1/2" x 11" (A4)

size

Copy

Back of

card

Front of

card

CARD

NOTE

If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,

load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the

bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper

size" on page 2-5.)

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.

8 x11

PLAIN

1. 8 x11

2. 11x17

3. 11x17

4. 8 x11

PLAIN

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

MULTI SHOT

MIRROR

IMAGE

CARD SHOT

SIZE RESET

CANCEL OK

FIT TO

PAGE

Copy_SEC.book 27 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-28

Touch the outer [OK] key.

You will return to the

main screen of copy

mode.

Place the original on the document glass.

Place the front side of

the original face down

and close the

document cover.

Follow steps 4 through 6 of "Copying from

the document glass" (page 4-12).

Press the [START] key.

The front side of the

card is scanned.

Place the back side of the original face

down on the document glass (see step 5).

Press the [START] key.

The back side of the

card is scanned.

Touch the [READ-END] key.

SIZE RESET

CANCEL OK

FIT TO

PAGE

NOTE

The original must be placed on the document glass.

The document feeder (automatic document feeder)

cannot be used.

To cancel the card shot function, touch the

[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting screen (the

screen of step 4).

05.fm 28 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時２８分

SPECIAL MODES

5-29

Mirror image

This function is used to print a mirror image of the original. The images will be inverted in the right to left direction

on the copies.

Touch the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in the

special modes screen (2nd screen).

The [MIRROR IMAGE]

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

mirror image icon ( )

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

B/W reverse

Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image.

Touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the

special modes screen (3rd screen).

The [B/W REVERSE]

key will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is turned on, and the

mirror image icon ( )

will appear in the upper

left of the screen.

Touch the [OK] key in the special modes

screen.

You will return to the main screen of copy mode.

Original Copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

TRANSPARENCY

INSERTS

MULTI SHOT

MIRROR

IMAGE

CARD SHOT

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the mirror image function, touch the

[MIRROR IMAGE] key in the special modes screen

(the screen of step 1).

NOTES

● When this function is selected, the exposure mode setting (page 4-14) automatically changes to "Text".

● Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be printed with black/white reverse

to reduce toner consumption.

Original B/W reverse copy

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special

functions" on page 5-2.

ECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU

B/W

REVERSE

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used,

see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document

glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-

13.

To cancel the B/W reverse function, touch the [B/W

REVERSE] key in the special modes screen (the

screen of step 1).

Copy_SEC.book 29 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-30

Print menu

The date, a stamp, page numbers, and entered text can be printed on copies. Four selections are available for the

PRINT MENU:

• Date print (page 5-33)

This prints the date on the paper.

[Example] Printing 2010/APR/4 in the upper right-

hand corner of the paper

The format of the date and the character that

separates the year, month, and day can be changed.

• Page numbering (page 5-35)

Page numbers can be printed on copies.

[Example] Printing page numbers in the bottom right-

hand corner of the paper

The format of the page number can be changed.

• Stamp (page 5-34)

Print a message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" in

reverse text on the paper.

[Example] Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the upper

right-hand corner of the paper

One of 12 stamps can be selected.

• Text (page 5-39)

Entered text can be printed.

[Example] Printing "Meeting" in the upper left-hand

corner of the paper

Up to 50 characters can be printed. You can store up

to 30 sequences of frequently used text.

Six printing positions are available: left, center, or right of the top or bottom of the page.

Each printing position is divided into an area for the date, page number, and text (A below), and an area for the stamp

(B below).

2010/APR/4

CONFIDENTIAL

Meeting

Top left Top right

Top center

Bottom left Bottom right

Bottom center

Print menu

Printing

area

Maximum number of

settings

DATE A One position only

STAMP B 6 positions

PAG E

NUMBERING

A One position only

TEXT A 6 positions

NOTES

● A part that overlaps the printed text will not be copied.

● If the set text content overlaps the print content of another position, the central print content will be moved to the

bottom, the content on the left will be next, and the content on the right will be placed on top in that order such

that only the content visible at the top is printed. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.

● The printed text will be printed at the set size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size.

● The printed text will also be printed at the set density regardless of the copy exposure.

● Some copy paper sizes may cause the printed contents to be cut off or the print position to shift.

● If a copy job with a print menu setting is saved using the document filing function, the print menu setting will not

be saved. If you wish to print a file saved in copy mode and use a print menu setting, use the special modes in

the Job settings / print screen (or the document filing print screen in the Web page if the machine is connected

to a network) to select the print menu setting. (A print menu setting cannot be selected when printing a file saved

in a mode other than copy mode.)

Copy_SEC.book 30 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-31

■ Common operation procedure for using the print menu

Touch the [PRINT MENU] key in the special

modes screen (3rd screen).

The print menu setting

screen will appear. The

print menu icon ( ) will

also appear in the upper

left corner of the screen

to indicate that the

function is turned on.

Select the print position.

Six positions are

available: left, center,

or right of the top or

bottom of the page.

The touched key is

highlighted.

The keys indicating the print position appear as

follows depending on the state of the setting:

The image displayed within each key varies

depending on the key position.

Select the print menu.

The settings screen of

the print menu

appears.

For information on

each of the print

menus, see the

settings of each.

● DATE (page 5-33) ● STAMP (page 5-34)

● PAGE NUMBERING (page 5-35)

● TEXT (page 5-39)

To select print menu settings at another

print position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Touch the key.

To specify the orientation of the original,

touch the [ORIGINAL ORIENTATION] key.

If you placed a two-sided original, touch the

[ ] key to specify the binding style (book or

tablet). The icon of the selected binding style is

highlighted.

If you are adding covers or inserts, select

whether or not you wish to print on the

covers or inserts.

If you do not wish to print on covers or inserts,

touch the checkbox to remove the checkmark.

To display the special modes screen...

See "General procedure for using special functions" on

page 5-2.

Not selected, print menu setting has not

been selected.

Selected during selection of the print

menu setting.

Not selected, print menu setting has

already been selected.

PRINT MENU

B/W

REVERSE

SPECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU

LAYOU

OKCANCELLAYOUT

DATE STAMP

TEXT

PAGE

NUMBERING

1/2

NOTES

● If the [DATE], [PAGE NUMBERING], or [TEXT] key

is touched when other than a "STAMP" print menu

setting has been selected for the print position

selected in step 2, a message will appear. To

overwrite the previously set print content of the

print menu that you touched, touch the [YES] key.

To keep the previous settings, touch the [NO] key.

●

The "DATE" and "PAGE NUMBERING" cannot be set

in multiple positions. If either of these keys is touched

when a date or page numbering setting has already

been configured, a message will appear asking you if

you wish to move the print settings to the position that

you selected in step 2. To move the print settings,

touch the [YES] key. Otherwise touch the [NO] key.

NOTES

●

If you are not copying on covers or inserts, printing will

not take place on these even if a checkmark appears.

● A page number is never printed on covers or

inserts, regardless of the above setting.

● If covers/inserts have been disabled in the

administrator settings, the checkbox will be grayed

out to prevent selection.

1/2

LAYOUT CANCEL OK

STAMP

TEXT

DATE

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

SPECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU

ORIGINAL ORIENTATION 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

2/2

CANCEL

LAYOUT

SPECIAL MODES

PRINT MENU

ORIGINAL ORIENTATION 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

2/2

Copy_SEC.book 31 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-32

Check the print layout if needed (page 5-

41).

To display the layout

and print content of the

configured print menu,

touch the [LAYOUT]

key. The position can

be changed and

settings canceled if

needed.

Touch the [OK] key on the print menu

setting screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the special modes

screen.

Printing in combination with other special functions

When a print menu is combined with one of the following special modes, printing will reflect the selected special

mode.

About the steps that follow

If an automatic document feeder is being used, see

pages 4-7 through 4-10.

If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11

through 4-13.

LAYOUT

CANCEL

S WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS

2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE

NOTE

To cancel print menu...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 3.

Special modes Printing operation

Margin shift Like the copy image, the printed contents are shifted in accordance with the set margin.

Dual page copy The print content is printed on each copy sheet.

Pamphlet copy

Book copy

The print content is printed on each page of the "book".

Multi shot

Card shot

The print content is printed on each copy sheet.

Covers/inserts In the print menu settings, specify whether or not the print content is printed on covers and inserts.

NOTE

When combined with "Erase", "Job build", "Mirror image" or "B/W reverse", printing takes place normally at the set

position on the paper.

Copy_SEC.book 32 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-33

■ Printing the date on copies

The date can be printed on copies. Four selections each are available for the date format and the character that

separates the year, month, and day.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

Touch the [DATE] key.

Select the date format.

The selected date format

is highlighted.

If you selected [YYYY/

MM/DD], [MM/DD/YYYY],

or [DD/MM/YYYY], you

can select the character

that separates the year,

month, and date. Select [/] (slash), [.] (period), [-]

(hyphen), or [ ] (space).

Check the date and format.

The date to be printed

is displayed in

"CURRENT SETTING"

in the selected format.

The date that appears

is the date set in the

machine. If you need to

change the date, touch the [DATE CHANGE] key.

The following screen appears.

Touch the key of the number (year, month, or day)

that needs to be changed, and then adjust the

number with the or key. When finished,

touch the [OK] key.

Select the pages to be printed on.

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

touched key is

highlighted.

Touch the [OK] key.

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

NOTE

The date must be previously set in the system settings. (See page 2-14.)

NOTE

If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30),

the [OK] key will gray out to prevent entry of the date.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

DATE

YYYY/MM/DD

MM/DD/YYYY

DD/MM/YYYY

MM DD, YYYY

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

CURRENT SETTING

2010/APR/04

DATE CHANGE

04 042010

YEAR

MONTH DAY

NOTE

To cancel a date print setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the date selection screen.

(The screen of step 6.)

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

CURRENT SETTING

2010/APR/04

DATE CHANGE

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

CURRENT SETTING

2010/APR/04

DATE CHANGE

05.fm 33 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時３０分

SPECIAL MODES

5-34

■ Printing a stamp (reverse text) on copies

A message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in reverse text on copies.

The following 12 messages are available.

You can select from three density levels for the background of the stamp.

Two selections are available for the size of the stamp.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

Touch the [STAMP] key.

Select the stamp that you wish to print.

The selected stamp is

highlighted. If the

desired stamp does not

appear, change

screens with the

or key.

Adjust the exposure as needed.

The density of the

background of the

stamp can be adjusted.

Touch the [EXPOSURE]

key to display the

following screen.

Touch the key for a

darker background.

Touch the key for a

lighter background (3

levels).

When finished, touch

the [OK] key.

Select the desired stamp size.

"LARGER" is initially

selected. To make the

stamp smaller, touch

the [LARGER/

SMALLER] key.

"Smaller" is selected

when [SMALLER] is

highlighted.

Select the pages to be printed on.

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

touched key is

highlighted.

Touch the [OK] key.

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY PRELIMINARY FINAL

FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY IMPORTANT COPY

URGENT DRAFT TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY

NOTE

The text of the stamp cannot be edited.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

PRIORITY

STAMP

CONFIDENTIAL

FOR YOUR INFO.

DO NOT COPY

URGENT

DRAFT

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

21 3

EXPOSURE

NOTE

To cancel a stamp setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the stamp selection

screen. (The screen of step 7.)

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

CANCEL OK

1/2

EXPOSURE

SMALLER

FIRST PAGE

ALL PAGES

1 32

LARGER

SIZE

Copy_SEC.book 34 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-35

■ Printing the page number on copies

The page number can be printed on copies. One of 6 formats can be selected for the page number.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

Touch the [PAGE NUMBERING] key.

Select the page number format.

The selected format is

highlighted.

If you selected "1/5, 2/5, 3/5",

"PAGE NUMBER/TOTAL PAGES" will be printed.

"AUTO" is initially selected for "TOTAL PAGE",

which means that the number of scanned original

pages is automatically used. If you need to enter

the total pages manually (for example, when a

large number of originals are scanned in batches),

touch the [MANUAL] key to display the total page

entry screen.

Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric

keys and touch the [OK] key.

If you need to change the starting or

ending number of page numbering, the

first page printed on, or the print settings

for covers/inserts, touch the [PAGE

NUMBER] key.

Touch the [MANUAL] key.

Enter settings for "FIRST NUMBER",

"LAST NUMBER", and "PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET".

Touch each key so that

it is highlighted, and

then enter the number

with the numeric keys

(1 to 999).

To return a number to

its initial value (FIRST

NUMBER: 1, LAST NUMBER: AUTO, PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET: 1), press the [C] (clear)

key while the key of the number is highlighted. If

you enter the wrong number, press the [C] (clear)

key and enter the correct number.

NOTES

● When two-sided copying is performed, each side of

the paper is counted as a page. If the last page is

blank, it will not be included in the total pages.

However, if [COUNT BACK COVER] is selected,

the last page will be counted. (See step 7.)

● When used in combination with "Dual page copy",

"Multi shot", or "Card shot", the number of copied

images is the total pages.

● When used in combination with "Pamphlet copy" or

"Book copy", the number of pages in the "book" is

the total pages.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

PAGE NUMBERING

PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT

1,2,3..

(1),(2),(3)..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

-1-,-2-,-3-..

<1>,<2>,<3>..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

PAGE NUMBERING

PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT

1,2,3..

-1-,-2-,-3-..

<1>,<2>,<3>..

(1),(2),(3)..

P.1,P.2,P.3..

1/5,2/5,3/5..

OKCANCEL

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

MANUAL

PAGE

NOTES

● A last number smaller than the "FIRST NUMBER"

number cannot be set.

● "LAST NUMBER" is initially set to "AUTO", which

means that the page number is printed on each

page through the final page in accordance with the

"FIRST NUMBER" and "PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET" settings.

● A number less than the total page number is set as

the last number, the page number will not be

printed on the pages that follow the set number.

●

Unlike the first and last page numbers, "PRINTING

STARTS FROM SHEET" specifies the sheet of paper

(not the page number) from which printing of the page

number begins.

For example, when "3" is selected for one-sided

copying, printing of the page number will start from the

3rd sheet of copy paper (the copy of the 3rd original

page). When "3" is selected for two-sided copying,

printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet

of copy paper, which is the copy of the 5th original page.

CANCEL

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

MANUAL

PAGE NUMBER

AUTO

MANUAL

FIRST NUMBER

PRINTING STARTS FROM

FIRST NUMBER

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

Copy_SEC.book 35 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-36

When covers/inserts are added and you

wish to include the covers/inserts in the

page number count, touch the [COVERS/

INSERTS COUNTING] key.

Select the checkboxes of the items that

you wish to include in the page number

count and then touch the [OK] key.

Items that are selected are reflected in the print

image on the right side of the screen.

Touch the [OK] key.

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

NOTES

● When an item is selected, one inserted sheet (front

cover, insert, or back cover) is counted as one page

during one-sided copying, and two pages during

two-sided copying. However, if one-sided copying

is used for the body pages and two-sided copying is

used for the inserted sheets, each body page will

be counted as one page and each inserted sheet

will be counted as two pages.

●

Printing never takes place on the front cover and back

cover, regardless of whether or not these are counted.

● To print on an insert, the insert must be counted

and it must be copied on.

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

COVERS/INSERTS

COUNTING

COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING

COUNT FRONT COVER

COUNT INSERTS

COUNT BACK COVER

Front cover

image

Back cover

image

Insert

image

NOTE

To cancel a page number setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the page number

selection screen. (The screen of step 10.)

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

COVERS/INSERTS

COUNTING

CANCEL

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

MANUAL

PAGE NUMBER

NOTES

●

Copying in group mode is not possible when page number printing is selected. The mode will automatically switch to sort mode.

● When the page number print position is set to the left or right side and "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy" is

selected, the position of the page numbers will alternate so that they are always on the outside when the

pamphlet/book is opened. If a stamp is set in an area with a page numbering setting, the position of the stamp

will alternate in the same way.

If another item is set in a position that changes, that item will appear in the position that alternates with the page

number position.

Print menus not related to the alternating print positions will appear in their set positions.

[Example] When the page number format "1, 2, 3.." is selected when performing pamphlet copying of 4 pages,

the copies will appear as shown below.

In this example, the page number is at the bottom of the page and the date is at the top, so the

position of the date does not change.

Date

Page numbering

Text

Stamp

2010/APR/4 2010/APR/4

Print settings Front

2010/APR/4 2010/APR/4

Minutes of meeting

Back

Minutes of meetingMinutes of meetingMinutes of meeting

CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIALCONFIDENTIAL

Copy_SEC.book 36 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-37

Examples of page number printing

Page number printing during one-sided copying (5 originals)

Page number printing during two-sided copying (9 originals)

Page number printing during one-sided copying of body pages with covers inserted (4 originals)

When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.

Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.

Setting Value 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

Printed contents when

settings are changed as

follows

FIRST NUMBER: 11 11/15 12/15 13/15 14/15 15/15

FIRST NUMBER: 11

LAST NUMBER: 13

11/13 12/13 13/13

Not printed Not printed

TOTAL PAGE: 2 1/2 2/2

Not printed Not printed Not printed

TOTAL PAGE: 15

FIRST NUMBER: 11

LAST NUMBER: 13

11/15 12/15 13/15

Not printed Not printed

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed

1/3 2/3 3/3

1/5

2/5

3/5

4/5

5/5

Setting Value

1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST

NUMBER

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING

STARTS FROM

SHEET

Printed contents

when settings

are changed as

follows

PRINTING

STARTS

FROM

SHEET: 3

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

1/52/53/54/55/5

Not

printed

1/9

2/9

3/9

4/9

5/9

6/9

7/9

8/9

9/9

Setting Value

1st page

(Front

cover)

2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

COUNT FRONT COVER

Not selected

Printed contents when

settings are changed

as follows

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 2

Not printed Not printed

1/3 2/3 3/3

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

Not printed

(count)

2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 2

Not printed

(count)

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

1/4

2/4

3/4

4/4

Copy_SEC.book 37 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-38

Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with covers (one-side copying) inserted (9 originals)

When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.

Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.

Page number printing during one-sided copying with inserts (4 originals; 5 originals when copying on inserts)

When inserts are not copied on, the page number is not printed.

Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with inserts (one-side copying) (9 originals)

Setting Value

1st page

(front cover)

2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page

Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back

TOTAL PAGE

AUTO

FIRST NUMBER

LAST NUMBER

AUTO

PRINTING

STARTS

FROM SHEET

COUNT FRONT

COVER

Not selected

Printed

contents

when

settings are

changed as

follows

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 3

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

Not

printed

1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

Not printed

(count)

Not printed

(count)

3/10 4/10 5/10 6/10 7/10 8/10 9/10 10/10

COUNT FRONT

COVER: Selected

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET: 3

Not

printed

(count)

Not

printed

(count)

Not

printed

Not

printed

1/62/63/64/65/66/6

A B

1/8

2/8

3/8

4/8

5/8

6/8

7/8

8/8

Setting Value 1st page 2nd page

3rd page

(insert)

4th page 5th page

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS FROM

SHEET

COUNT INSERTS Not selected

Printed contents when

copying on inserts and

settings are changed as

follows

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed Not printed

1/2 2/2

COUNT INSERTS: Selected 1/5 2/5

3/5 (count)

4/5 5/5

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed 1/3 (count)

2/3 3/3

Printed contents when not

copying on inserts and

settings are changed as

follows

COUNT INSERTS: Selected 1/5 2/5

Not printed

(count)

4/5 5/5

COUNT INSERTS: Selected

PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3

Not printed Not printed

Not printed

(count)

2/3 3/3

1/4

2/4

C D

3/4

4/4

Setting Value

1st page 2nd page

3rd page

(insert)

4th page 5th page

Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back

TOTAL PAGE AUTO

FIRST NUMBER 1

LAST NUMBER AUTO

PRINTING STARTS

FROM SHEET

COUNT INSERTS Not selected

Printed contents

when settings are

changed as follows

COUNT

INSERTS:

Selected

1/10 2/10 3/10 4/10 5/10

Not

printed

(count)

7/10 8/10 9/10 10/10

1/8

2/8

3/8

4/8

E F

5/8

6/8

7/8

8/8

Copy_SEC.book 38 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-39

■ Printing entered text on copies

Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 50 characters can be printed.

Up to 30 sequences of frequently used text can be stored. See "Storing text sequences" (page 5-40).

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

Touch the [TEXT] key.

If you wish to use one of the preset text

sequences, touch the [RECALL] key. To

directly enter the text, touch the [DIRECT

ENTRY] key.

If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character

entry screen will appear. For information on

entering characters, see page 7-29. When

finished, click the [OK] key to close the character

entry screen. (Go to step 6.)

The stored text sequences will appear as

keys. Touch the key of the desired text

sequence.

The selected text sequence key is highlighted.

If the desired text sequence key does not appear,

change screens with the or key.

The display is initially set to show 6 keys per

screen. This can be changed to 3 keys per screen

by touching the [3 6] key. When 3 keys are

displayed, the entire text sequence will appear in

each key. (When 6 keys are displayed, up to 22

characters appear in each key.)

Touch the [OK] key.

To edit the selected text

sequence, touch the

[DIRECT ENTRY] key

to display the character

entry screen. The

selected text sequence

is entered. For

information on entering characters, see page 7-

29. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

Select the pages to be printed on.

Select whether to print

on only the first page,

or all pages. The

touched key is

highlighted.

Touch the [OK] key.

Continue from step 4 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

NOTE

When the machine is connected to a network, the printed text sequences can be stored and deleted in the Web

page. For details, see Help in the Web page.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

TEXT

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

PRE-SET

ALL PAGES

DIRECT ENTRYSTORE/DELETERECALL

TEXT

RECALL

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 Meeting

No.03

No.04

No.05

No.06

DIRECT ENTRY

1/5

CANCEL

NOTE

To cancel a text setting...

Touch the [CANCEL] key in the text print screen. (The

screen of step 7.)

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

1/5

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

DIRECT ENTRY

ALL PAGES

CANCEL

FIRST PAGE

DIRECT ENTRY

ALL PAGES

05.fm 39 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時３１分

SPECIAL MODES

5-40

Storing text sequences

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

Touch the [TEXT] key.

Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

Touch a key that has not been

programmed (a key in which No. xx

appears).

When touched, the character entry screen

appears. Enter the text (max. 50 characters). For

information on entering characters, see page 7-

29. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

If no free keys appear, change screens with the

or key.

Touch the [BACK] key.

The entered text is

stored.

Editing and deleting stored text

Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common

operation procedure for using the print

menu" (page 5-31).

Touch the [TEXT] key.

Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

Touch the text key that you wish to edit or

delete.

To edit the text, touch the [AMEND] key. To

delete the text, touch the [DELETE] key.

When the [AMEND] key is

touched, the character

entry screen appears.

The selected text

sequence is entered. For

information on entering

characters, see page

. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the

character entry screen.

If you touch the [DELETE] key, the text will be deleted

and you will return to the screen of step 4.

To cancel editing or deletion, touch the [CANCEL] key.

Touch the [BACK] key.

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

RECALL STORE/DELETE

PRE-SET

TEXT

STORE/DELETE

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 Meeting

No.03

No.04

No.05

No.06

BACK

1/5

3 6

BACK

1/5

04 Minutes of meeting

PAGE

NUMBERING

CANCEL

LAYOUT

STAMP

DATE

TEXT

1/2

RECALL STORE/DELETE

PRE-SET

TEXT

STORE/DELETE

No.01 TARO YAMADA

No.02 Meeting

No.03

No.04 Minutes of meeting

No.05

No.06

BACK

1/5

3 6

A TEXT HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED TO

LOCATION.CHANGE THE TEXT?

No.06

CANCEL DELETE AMEND

3 6

BACK

1/5

04 Minutes of meeting

05.fm 40 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時３２分

SPECIAL MODES

5-41

■ Checking and changing the print layout

You can check the print layout after the print items have been selected. If needed you can change the print

position or delete print content.

Touch the [LAYOUT] key on the print menu

screen.

Touch the key in which you wish to change

the print position or delete print content.

To change the print position, touch the

[MOVE] key. To delete print content, touch

the [DELETE] key.

If you touched the

[MOVE] key, the new

position selection

screen appears.

If you touched the

[DELETE] key, the print

content is deleted. (Go

to step 6.)

Touch the key of the new position.

The selected key is

highlighted and the

print position changes

to the new position.

The keys indicating the print position appear as

follows depending on the state of the setting:

Touch the [OK] key.

If you attempt to move

print content to a

position that already

has print content set, a

message will appear

asking you if you wish

to overwrite the

previously set content.

To overwrite the content, touch the [YES] key. To

cancel the move and return to the condition before

the [OK] key was touched, touch the [NO] key.

Touch the [OK] key.

NOTE

Up to 14 characters of the print text appears in the

key.

CANCEL

STAMP

TEXT

LAYOUT

DATE

PAGE

NUMBERING

LAYOUT

TARO YAMADA

CONFIDENTIAL

DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

DO YOU WANT TO MOVE OR DELETE THE

SELECTED ITEM?

CANCEL

DELETE MOVE

1,2,3..

Print position without any set print

menus.

Currently set print position.

Print position with another competing

print menu set.

(When moving a stamp, this indicates

that another stamp has been set. When

moving a print menu other than a stamp,

this indicates that the date, page number,

or text has been set.)

NOTE

If you wish to swap the contents of two positions,

temporarily move the content of one position to an

unused position and then complete the swap.

SELECTED ITEM.

DO NOT COPY

1,2,3..

CONFIDENTIAL

Copy_SEC.book 41 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

5-42

STORING, USING AND DELETING

JOB PROGRAMS

The steps of up to 10 copy jobs can be stored as job programs. Job programs can be called up with ease, and are

retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently used copy settings in a job program, you can

eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job.

●If any settings related to the steps of a job program are changed in the administrator settings after the job program

is stored, the steps related to the changed settings will not be included when the job program is called up.

●To exit the job programs mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the

touch panel.

Storing a job program

Press the [#/P] key.

Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

Touch the number key ([1] to [10]) in which

you wish to store the job program.

Number keys in which

job programs are

already stored are

highlighted.

Select the copy settings that you wish to

store in the job program.

The number of copies

cannot be stored.

Touch the [OK] key.

The selected settings

will be stored in the

number key selected in

step 3.

■ If a number key is selected in step 3 that has

already been programmed.

A setting confirmation screen will appear. To replace

the existing program with the new program, touch

the [STORE] key and continue from step 4. If you do

not wish to replace the existing program, touch the

[CANCEL] key to return to the screen of step 3 and

select a different number key.

LOGOUT

M NUMBER.

RECALL STORE/DELETE

PROGRAMS

ESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL STORE/

SPECIAL MODES

TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS

[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].

2-SIDED COPY

OUTPUT

8 x11

8 x14

11x7

NOTE

If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been

prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be

possible to store or delete a job program. (See page

17 of the administrator settings guide.)

AUTO

ORIGINAL

OKNCEL

Copy_SEC.book 42 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS

5-43

Calling up a job program

Press the [#/P] key.

Touch the number key of the desired job

program.

The screen

automatically closes and

the job program is called

up. A number key that

does not have a job

program cannot be

selected.

Set the number of copies if needed and

then press the [START] key.

Copying will begin using

the settings of the job

program.

Deleting a stored job program

Press the [#/P] key.

Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.

Select a storage register number of the

program to be deleted.

If a number key for which

no job program has been

stored is selected, the

screen will change to the

screen of step 4 on the

previous page for storing

a job program.

Touch the [DELETE] key.

The selected program is

deleted and you return

to the screen of step 3.

To return to the screen of

step 3 without deleting

the job program, touch

the [CANCEL] key. In

both cases, touch the

[EXIT] key displayed in the screen of step 3 to exit

the job program mode.

LOGOUT

JOB PROGRAMS

PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.

RECALL

LOGOUT

M NUMBER.

RECALL STORE/DELETE

EXIT

STORE/DELETE

NOTE

If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been

prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be

possible to store or delete a job program. (See page

17 of the administrator settings guide.)

RECALL STORE/DELETE

A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED

IN THIS LOCATION.

CANCEL DELETE STORE

Copy_SEC.book 43 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

5-44

INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN

The copy of the original scanned in interrupt mode is output before the remainder of the interrupted copy job.

Touch the [INTERRUPT] key.

If interrupt copying is

possible during a copy

run, the [INTERRUPT]

key will appear. (If the

key does not appear,

interrupt copying is not

possible.)

When the [INTERRUPT]

key is touched in step 1,

the [INTERRUPT] key

will be replaced by the

[CANCEL] key as shown

in the illustration.

To cancel an interrupt

copy job while the interrupt original is being

scanned or while you are selecting copy settings,

touch the [CANCEL] key.

Place the original for the interrupt copy job

in the document feeder or on the

document glass (page 4-3).

Select the exposure mode, paper size,

number of copies, and any other copy

settings as needed, and then press the

[START] key.

The previous copy job automatically

resumes after the interrupt job finishes.

NOTES

● If you touch the [INTERRUPT] key when auditing

mode is enabled, the display will prompt you to

enter your account number. Enter your account

number with the numeric keys. The copies you

make will be added to the count of the entered

account number.

● If a copy is being printed when the [INTERRUPT]

key is pressed, interrupt mode will begin after the

copy is finished.

● If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy

job, two-sided copying, sort copying, and staple

sort copying cannot be selected. If any of these

functions are necessary, use the document feeder.

AUTO

ORIGINA

RIGINAL

EXPOSUR

8 x11

INTERRUPT

CANCEL

ORIGINAL

8 x11

AUTO

EXPOSURE

AUTO 8 x11

EXPOSURE

AUTO 8 x11

PAPER SELECT

100%

05.fm 44 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時４５分

6-1

CHAPTER 6

MACHINE MAINTENANCE

(FOR COPYING)

This chapter explains procedures for cleaning the machine, and

troubleshooting.

Page

USER MAINTENANCE........................................................................... 6-2

●

Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder .......

6-2

●

Cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum.......................

6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 6-3

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

6-2

USER MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder

If the document glass, document cover or automatic document scanning unit have dirty spots, these spots will form

lines in scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Always keep these parts clean.

Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the

cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent.

When finished, wipe dry with a clean cloth. When

cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or similar

volatile cleaning agents.

If black or white stripes appear on printed images of originals that were fed through the

automatic document feeder, wipe the long narrow glasses in the scanning unit ((A) and

(B) in the illustration).

Cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum

If black (or white) lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and document feeder, use the

charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the drum.

Switch off the power switch (see page 1-

17).

Open the front cover.

Slowly pull out the green knob (charger

cleaner).

Once the knob is pulled out, slowly push it

back in.

Close the front cover and switch on the

power switch.

(A)

(B)

CAUTION

Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical

components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.

Charger cleaner

NOTES

● If this does not solve the problem, pull the knob out and push it back in 2 more times.

● When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.

Example of dirty print image

Black stripes White stripes

06.fm 2 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時３４分

6-3

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you

are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the power switch, and unplug the power cord.

Problems related to the copy function are described below. For problems related to general use of the machine, see

page 2-23.

Problem Check Solution

Machine does not

operate.

Is the [START] key indicator off? This indicates that the machine is warming

up (warming up lasts no more than 80

seconds after the power switch is turned on).

Copying is not possible during this time.

Wait until the [START] key light illuminates.

Copies are too dark

or too light.

Is the original image too dark or too light? Select an appropriate exposure mode for

the original being copied and adjust the copy

exposure. (See page 4-14.)

Is the exposure mode set to "AUTO"? The exposure level for "AUTO" can be

adjusted using the "Exposure adjustment" in

the administrator settings. Contact your

administrator. (See page 16 of the

administrator settings guide.)

An appropriate exposure mode for the

original has not been selected.

Change the exposure mode to "AUTO" or

manually select an appropriate resolution

setting. (See page 4-14.)

Text is not clear on a

copy.

An appropriate exposure mode for the

original has not been selected.

Change the exposure mode to "TEXT". (See

page 4-14.)

Smudges appear on

copies.

Document glass or document cover dirty? Clean regularly. (See page 6-2.)

Black lines appear on copies when the

automatic document feeder is used.

Clean the original scanning area. (See page

6-2.)

Original smudged or blotchy? Use a clean original.

Image cannot be

rotated.

Is the auto paper select or auto image

function selected?

Rotation copy functions only if the machine

is either in the auto paper select mode or in

the auto image mode. (See page 4-15.)

Part of original

image is not copied.

Is the original positioned correctly? Set the original properly. (See page 4-3.)

Is the copy ratio proper for the original and

paper sizes?

Use the auto image function to select the

appropriate copy ratio based on the original

and copy sizes. (See page 4-15.)

Blank copies Is the original placed correctly? When using the document glass, place the

original face down.

When using the automatic document feeder,

place original face down. (See page 4-3.)

Order of copies

incorrect

Is the order of originals correct? When using the document glass, place the

originals from the first page one sheet at a

time.

When using the automatic document feeder,

place the originals with the first page down.

Job cancellation

needed

Is a message requesting cancellation of job

displayed?

Press the [CA] key to cancel the current job.

Copy_SEC.book 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

7-1

CHAPTER 7

DOCUMENT FILING

FUNCTION

Page

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 7-2

●

Document filing function.................................................................. 7-2

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..................................... 7-4

●

A look at the operation panel .......................................................... 7-4

●

Saving files...................................................................................... 7-4

●

Main screen of document filing ....................................................... 7-5

●

Document filing icons...................................................................... 7-5

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE .................................................... 7-6

●

Quick File ........................................................................................ 7-6

●

Filing................................................................................................ 7-7

●

Print jobs ......................................................................................... 7-9

●

Scan Save....................................................................................... 7-10

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE.......................................................... 7-13

●

Searching for and calling up a saved file......................................... 7-13

●

Calling up and using a saved file..................................................... 7-15

●

File selection screen ....................................................................... 7-16

SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 7-24

●

Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders.................. 7-24

ENTERING CHARACTERS.................................................................... 7-29

TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 7-31

07-1.fm 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後５時４７分

7-2

OVERVIEW

Document filing function

This function can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

The document filing function allows you to save a document image in the machine's hard disk as a data file. The

image can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed.

The scanned document image is saved when printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or

image send mode ("QUICK FILE" or "FILE"). A document can also be scanned and saved without being printed,

copied, or transmitted ("scan save").

To allow you to search for the file and call it up, names (user name, file name, etc.) can be assigned to the file (except

when using Quick File in copy mode or fax/image send mode).

■ Data flow

File 1

File 2

QUICK FILE FOLDER

File 1

File 2

MAIN FOLDER CUSTOM FOLDER

A password

can be set

A password

can be set

A password

can be set

Folder 1

Folder 2

Folder 3 File 1

File 2

Machine hard disk

Save to machine's

hard disk

HDD

and

Send

(facsimile or image send

function must be required)

Printing in copy mode (Quick

File saving, page 7-6)

Printing from a computer (printer

data, page 7-9)

Transmission in fax/image send

mode (filing, page 7-7)

Scanning a document only

(scan save, page 7-10)

Data is saved by job

A user name and file name is

specified for each saved job

A user name and file name can

be specified for each file and

the file saved to a folder with

any desired name assigned.

Call up a saved

file to reuse it.

●A stored file can be moved to a different folder under certain conditions (page 7-22).

Copy_SEC.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

OVERVIEW

7-3

■ Quick File folder

When [QUICK FILE FOLDER] is selected in the main screen of any of the modes, the file is saved in this folder.

Up to 1000 files can be saved in the Quick File folder. All files in the Quick File Folder can be deleted using the

administrator settings. If you have a file that you do not want deleted, set the file attribute to [PROTECT] (up to 500

files can be protected). (See [Property change] on page 7-21)

The following user and file names are automatically assigned:

User name : User unknown

File name (example) : COPY_04042010_113050AM (job mode and month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/

PM of save). (In the example, the file was saved on 4/4/2010 at 11:30 and 50 sec in copy mode.)

When saved, jobs are classified by mode. A saved job can be called up from the COMPLETE job status screen.

■ Main folder

When saving a file, a previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and

any file name can be assigned.

A password can also be set for a saved file ([CONFIDENTIAL] save). (See [Property change] on page 7-21.)

If a user name and file name are not selected, a name in the same format as Quick File is automatically assigned.

■ Custom folder

Up to 500 folders (named as desired) can be created in this folder. When saving a file in one of these folders, a

previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and any file name can be

assigned.

A password can be set for a file saved in one of these folders.

■ Attributes of saved files

The protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being

moved or automatically or manually deleted.

Three attributes are available for saved files: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [CONFIDENTIAL]. When saved with

the [SHARING] attribute, a file is not protected. When saved with the [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, a

file is protected.

Files saved to the Quick File folder are all [SHARING]. When saving a file to the main folder or a custom folder,

[SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] can be selected.

● A [SHARING] file can be changed to a [PROTECT]

or [CONFIDENTIAL]

file using

[Property change] (page 7-21).

● A password is set for a [CONFIDENTIAL] file to protect it. (The password must be entered to call up the file.)

● A password cannot be set for a [PROTECT] file, however, as long as the file is not changed to [SHARING] with

[PROPERTY CHANGE], the file will be protected.

CAUTION

● Documents saved with [QUICK FILE] are shared files that can be called up by anyone and printed or transmitted.

For this reason, do not use Quick File for sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused

by others.

● When saving a document with [FILE], set the attribute to [CONFIDENTIAL] and set a password to prevent others

from reusing the document.

● Even when a file is saved with the [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, the attribute can be changed afterward to

[SHARING] using [Property change] (page 7-21). For this reason, do not save sensitive documents or

documents that you do not want to be reused by others.

● Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result

from the leaking of sensitive information due to 1) manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick

File function or filing function, or 2) incorrect operation of the Quick File function or filing function by the operator

that saves the data.

Copy_SEC.book 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

7-4

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

A look at the operation panel

(1) Touch panel (see the next page)

This displays messages and keys. Keys can be

touched to select and enter settings.

When a key is touched, a beep will sound and the

key will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected.

When a key cannot be selected in a screen, it will

be grayed out. If touched, a warning beep will

sound to alert you that it cannot be selected.

(2) Mode select keys

Use this key to select the mode.

(3) [DOCUMENT FILING] key

Touch this key to display the main screen of

document filing mode.

(4) Numeric keys

Use these keys to enter a password or a numeric

value for a setting.

(5) [C] key (Clear key)

Use this key if you make a mistake when entering

a password or numeric setting.

This key is also used to cancel scanning of a

document.

(6) [CA] key (Clear all key)

Use this key to cancel a setting procedure and

return to the main screen. The key is also used to

cancel a special function.

(7) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

Use this key to store, edit or delete a user name or

custom folder.

Saving files

To save files to the main folder or custom folders, a user name must be previously stored. To create a folder in the

custom folder, the folder name must be stored. These settings are configured in the system settings.

Follow the procedures explained in "Programming a user name", "Editing and deleting a user name", "Creating a

custom folder", and "Editing/deleting a custom folder" on pages 7-25 to 7-28.

LOGOUT

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7)

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION

7-5

Main screen of document filing

To display the main screen of document filing, press

the [DOCUMENT FILING] key when the touch panel

shows the copy mode screen, image send mode, or the

job status screen.

The main screen shows messages, keys, and items

that can be selected for document filing.

(1) Message display

Displays messages.

(2) [SCAN TO HDD] key

Touch to select scan save. Scan save is used to

save the image file of a scanned document in the

main folder or a custom folder without printing or

transmitting the document.

(3) [FILE FOLDER] key

Touch to call up a file from the main folder or the

custom folder.

When the key is touched, the files in

the main folder or the folders in the custom folder

appear.

(4) [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key

Touch to call up a file from the Quick File folder.

When the key is touched, the files in the Quick File

folder appear.

(5) [SEARCH] key

Touch to search for a file by user name, file name,

or folder name.

(6) [HDD STATUS] key

Touch to check the use of the machine's hard disk.

Document filing icons

The following icons may appear added to a main icon

or alone.

HDD STATUS

SCAN TO HDD

FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE STORE

GLOBAL ACCESS

(2) (4)(3) (5) (6)

(1)

Main

icon

Icon of

confidential

file or folder

Icon of

protected

file

Meaning

Folder

Copy job file

Print job file

(including direct

print jobs)

Fax transmission

job file

PC-FAX

transmission job

file

Internet fax

transmission job

file

PC-Internet fax

transmission job

file

Scan save file

E-mail

transmission job

file

FTP

transmission job

file

Desktop

transmission job

file

Network Folder

transmission job

file

Icon

Meaning

Confidential file or folder

Protected file

NOTE

When the file of a job that was saved using scan

save is printed in job settings, the icon of the job is

highlighted.

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

7-6

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

Quick File

When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or fax/image transmission mode, "QUICK

FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.

The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate

the original.

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray and select resolution and exposure

settings.

See steps 1 to 8 of

"Making copies with the

automatic document

feeder" on pages 4-7 to

4-8 and "ADJUSTING

THE EXPOSURE" on

page 4-14.

Touch the [QUICK FILE] key in the main

screen.

The [QUICK FILE] key

will be highlighted to

indicate that the function

is selected.

If the [FILE] key is

grayed out, only the

[QUICK FILE] key can

be selected.

When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message

asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch

the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the

next step.

If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK

FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the

[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.

Press the [START] key on the operation

panel.

To prevent accidental

saving of the document,

the warning "THE

SCANNED DATA IS

STORED IN THE

QUICK FILE FOLDER."

appears for 6 seconds

after the [START] key is pressed.

When copying begins, the image is saved.

The saved image can be called up from the

Quick File folder or the job status screen.

●To call the image up from the Quick File

folder, see "Calling up and using a saved file"

on page 7-15.

●To call the job up from the finished job status

screen, see "Calling up and manipulating a

file from the job status screen" on page 7-23.

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called up

in step 4.

●Print the image (page 7-17)

●Transmit the image (page 7-20)

●Change the attribute (page 7-21)

●Move the image (page 7-22)

●Delete the image (page 7-22)

●Check details on the image (page 7-22)

NOTE

As an example, the procedure for saving a document to the Quick File folder while copying using the automatic

document feeder is explained below.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

8 x11

QUICK FILE

FILE

Copy_SEC.book 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-7

Filing

When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode, "FILE" can be selected

to save an image of the document to the main folder or a previously created custom folder. The image can be called

up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original.

Place the originals in the document feeder

tray and select resolution and exposure

settings.

See steps 1 to 8 of

"Making copies with the

automatic document

feeder" on pages 4-7 to

4-8 and "ADJUSTING

THE EXPOSURE" on

page 4-14.

Touch the [FILE] key in the main screen.

An information entry

screen appears.

Touch the [USER NAME] key.

Touch the desired user name in the list of

user names that appears.

User names must be previously stored

("Programming a user name" on page 7-25).

Touch the [OK] key.

The touched user name is selected and you return to the

screen of step 3. The selected user name appears.

Touch the [FILE NAME] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter a file

name (maximum of 30

characters). (See page

7-29 to enter

characters.)

Touch the [STORED TO:] key.

Touch the desired folder name in the list of

folder names that appears

Folder names must be previously stored.

("Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27). If a

password has been set for the folder, a password

entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit

password for the folder.

NOTE

As an example, the procedure for using the filing function while copying using the automatic document feeder is

explained below.

AUTO

ORIGINAL

EXPOSURE

8 x11

QUICK FILE

FILE

USER NAME

CONFIDENTIAL

MAI

COPY

FILE NAME

STORED TO:

Suzuki

Ono

Hasegawa

Sasaki

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCD

ALL USERS

Yamada

Nakata

1/1

NOTE

If you do not select a user name, the following name

is automatically selected:

Example : User unknown

NOTE

If you do not enter a file name, a file name in the

following format is automatically assigned:

Auto generated file name : Month, day, year, hour,

minute, second, AM/PM

(Example : COPY_04042010_113050AM)

USER NAME

FILE NAME

STORED TO:

MAI

COPY

USER NAME

FILE NAME

STORED TO:

MAIN

COPY

ALL FOLDERS

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS

UVWXY

1/2

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-8

Touch the [OK] key.

The touched folder is

selected and you return

to the screen of step 7.

The selected folder

name is displayed.

If needed, select the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox (only in copy mode).

When this is selected, the

file is stored with the

attribute [CONFIDENTIAL].

To call up the file, the

password that will be set in

the following steps must be

entered.

●If you selected the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox, touch the [PASSWORD] key and

enter a password.

●If you did not select the [CONFIDENTIAL]

checkbox, go to step 16. The file will be saved

as a [SHARING] file.

Touch the [PASSWORD] key.

The password entry

screen appears.

Enter a 5-digit password with the numeric

keys.

As each digit is entered,

" changes to " ".

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the screen of step 10.

The set password is displayed with " ".

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the main screen.

Press the [START] key on the operation

panel.

When copying begins,

the image is saved.

The saved image can be called up using

the file name, folder name, or user name,

or from the filing folder.

●To call up the image by entering the file name,

folder name, or user name, see "Searching

for and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13.

●To call up the image from the filing folder, see

"Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-

15.

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called

up:

●Print the image (page 7-17)

●Transmit the image (page 7-20)

●Change the attribute (page 7-21)

●Move the image (page 7-22)

●Delete the image (page 7-22)

●Check details on the image (page 7-22)

FOLDER

2/2

USER NAME

FILE NAME

CONFIDENTIAL

FILE INFORMATION

PASSWORD

CAN

XYYY

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

10-KEY PAD.

XYYY

CANCEL

PASSWORD

Copy_SEC.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-9

Print jobs

Print jobs sent to the machine using the machine's

printer driver can be saved in the main folder or a

previously created custom folder when printed. The

saved print data can be called up and printed or

transmitted without having to open the original file on

your computer.

This section gives an overview of this function and

explains the procedure for printing from the operation

panel of the machine.

For the procedures that are performed at your

computer when initiating printing such as selecting the

save location and file attribute, see the printer driver

Help file.

■ Using a print job file (printing,

deleting, transmitting, etc.)

Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on

where the file is saved.

●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is

saved in the main folder or the custom folder.

Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the

file is saved in the Quick File folder.

If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the

files in the main folder or the folders in the

custom folder appear. If you open the wrong

folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the

[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the

correct folder.

●If the desired file is saved in the main folder,

go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a

custom folder, go to step 3.

●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]

key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.

Go to step 4.

Touch the key of the folder that contains

the desired file.

If a password is set for

the selected folder, a

password entry screen

will appear. Enter the 5-

digit password with the

numeric keys.

Touch the printer icon ( ) tab and then

touch the key of the desired file.

The following screen appears if the [QUICK FILE

FOLDER] key is touched in step 2.

Touch the key of the file that you wish to call up. A

menu screen will appear.

If a password is set for the file, a password entry

screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with

the numeric keys.

Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17)

(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)

(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)

(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22)

(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22)

(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22)

The setting screen of the selected operation

appears. See the indicated page.

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

HDD STATUS

OPQRSJKLMNEFGHIABCD

CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTO

ALL FOLDERS

MAIN FOLDER

SEARCHCUSTOM FOLDER BACK

1/1

FILE NAME

Basic

Yamada

2003/10/01

Sato

Akata

presentation

Product

PRINTS

USER NAME DATE

BATCH P.

QUICK FILE FOLDER

SEARCH BACK

FILE NAME

Tanaka7890123456

User unknown

2003/10/01

User unknown

Suzuki7890123456

PRINTS

USER NAME DATE

BATCH P.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)

SELECT THE JOB.

MOVE

SEND

DELETE

PROPERTY

CHANGE

DETAIL

JOB SETTINGS

Basic specifications Yamada Taro

CANCEL

8 "x11"

Copy_SEC.book 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-10

Scan Save

Scan save is used to save a scanned document image in the main folder or the custom folder without copying or transmitting it.

Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

Touch the [SCAN TO HDD] key.

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.

Select any special

functions that you wish

to use (otherwise skip

this step).

When the [SPECIAL

MODES] key is touched,

the special modes

selection screen appears. (See "Using special

functions for scan save" on page 7-12.)

Touch the [FILE INFORMATION] key.

The screens for selecting the user name, file

name, folder, and attribute appear. Configure

the settings as explained in step 3 to step 15 on

pages 7-7 to 7-8. When step 15 is completed, you

will return to the main screen of document filing.

Perform any of the following steps 7 to 16

as needed. When finished, go to step 17 on

page 7-11.

●To set the original size, perform steps 7 to 10.

●To set the resolution, perform steps 11 to 13

on page

7-11

●To select the exposure, perform steps 14 to 16

on page

7-11

●If you no not wish to select any of the above

settings, go to step 17 on page 7-11.

Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.

To set the original size, see "Manually

setting the scanning size" on page 4-5.

If the original is two-sided, touch the [2-

SIDED BOOKLET] key or the [2-SIDED

TABLET] key depending on where the

pages are bound.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 7.

NOTE

For explanations of the special functions, see page

7-12 and chapter 5.

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

SCAN TO HDD

FILE STORE

SPECIAL MODES

FILE

INFORMATION

FILE

INFORMATION

SPECIAL MODES

SCAN TO HDD

FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

FILE STORE

HDD STATUS

GLOBAL ACCESS

NOTE

If the original pages are bound at the side, the

document is a "booklet". If the original pages are

bound at the top, the document is a "tablet".

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

AUTO

300x300dpi

2-SIDED

BOOKLET

2-SIDED

TABLET

SCAN SIZE STORE SIZ

100%

AUTO AUTO

STORE SIZE

AUTO

IDED

Copy_SEC.book 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-11

Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.

Touch the key of the desired resolution.

Select one of four resolution levels as appropriate

for the original.

The selected resolution key is highlighted.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 11.

Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.

Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL].

To have the exposure

adjusted automatically,

select [AUTO].

If you selected

[MANUAL], touch the

or key to adjust

the exposure.

(For a darker image, touch

the key. For a lighter

image, touch the key.)

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 14.

Place the original and touch the [START]

key.

[Placing the original]

●For information on placing the original, see

"NORMAL COPYING" in chapter 4.

●If you selected the "Card Shot" special function,

the document glass must be used.

●If you selected job build mode, the automatic

document feeder must be used.

Scanning begins.

If you are using the

document glass, touch

the [READ-END] key

after all pages have

been scanned.

The saved image can be called up using

the file name, folder name, or user name,

or from the filing folder.

●To call up the image by entering the file name,

folder name, or user name, see "Searching

for and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13.

●To call up the image from the filing folder, see

"Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-

15.

The following operations can be

performed on the image that was called up

in step 18:

●Print the image (page 7-17)

●Transmit the image (page 7-20)

●Change the attribute ((page 7-21)

●Move the image (page 7-22)

●Delete the image (page 7-22)

●Check details on the image (page 7-22)

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

EXPOSURE

AUTO

300x300dpi

PRESS

[START]

SCAN

ORIGINAL

SCAN TO HDD

EXPOSURE

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

200x200dpi

400x400dpi

600x600dpi

300x300dpi

HALF TONE

AUTO

HALF TONE

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

EXPOSURE

AUTO

300x300dpi

MANUAL

AUTO

MANUAL

AUTO

NOTE

This completes the scan save procedure. Follow the

steps below when you wish to call up the image and

print or transmit it.

MANUAL

Copy_SEC.book 11 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE

7-12

■ Using special functions for scan save

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main scan save screen to display the special modes screen.

The functions below can be selected in this screen.

(1) [ERASE] key (see page 5-4)

Use this function to erase shadows that can appear

around the edges of the image when books and

other thick originals are scanned.

(2) [DUAL PAGE SCAN] key (see page 5-5)

(Equivalent to Dual page copy in copy mode)

This function is used to save the opened pages of

a book in order one page at a time (left page then

right page).

(3)

[2in1] key (

see page 5-24

)

(When the fax or image send function is installed,

this corresponds to the 2in1 function explained in

the fax and network scanner manuals. This also

corresponds to the "Multi shot" function in copy

mode; however, only 2in1 is possible for scan

save.)

This function reduces two original pages and

arranges the images on a single page in a uniform

layout.

(4) [JOB BUILD] key (see page 5-8)

When you have more pages than can be placed in

the document feeder at once, this function allows

you to scan the pages in sets.

(5) [CARD SHOT] key (see page 5-27)

This function allows you to save the front and back

side of a card on a single page (instead of saving

each side as a separate file).

ORIGINAL

RESOLUTION

BACK

SPECIAL MODES

FILE

INFORMATION

EXPOSURE

SCAN TO HDD

AUTO

READY TO SCAN TO HDD.

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

300x300dpi

[READY TO SCAN TO HDD.

PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.

SPECIAL MODES

ERASE

DUAL PAGE

SCAN

CARD SHOT

JOB

BUILD

2in1

(1)

(4) (5)

(2) (3)

Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]

key in the main screen.

Copy_SEC.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

7-13

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

Searching for and calling up a saved file

When calling up a file, you can enter the file name, folder name, or user name to quickly search for the file.

To search for a file, touch the [SEARCH] key in the main screen of document filing mode or in a screen that shows

folders or files in a folder. A data search screen will appear.

■ Procedure for searching for a file

Touch the [SEARCH] key in the main

screen of document filing mode or in a

screen that shows folders or files in a

folder.

If you touch the

[SEARCH] key in the

screen that shows the

folders in the custom

folder or a screen that

shows the files in a

folder, the [SEARCH

WITHIN CURRENT FOLDER] checkbox will

appear. Select this checkbox to search for a file

only in the selected folder.

In the data search screen, select whether

you will search by [USER NAME] or [FILE

OR FOLDER NAME].

●

To search by user name, follow steps 3 to 6.

●To search by file name or folder name,

perform step 8.

●To stop searching, touch the [CANCEL]key.

[Searching by user name]

Touch the [USER NAME] key.

Touch the one-touch key of the user name

that you wish to use to search for the file.

If you wish to directly enter the user name,

touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key.

●The selected user name is highlighted.

●If you select the wrong user name, touch the

key of the correct name.

●If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a

character entry screen will appear. Enter the

user name.

See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering

characters.

Touch the [OK] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2 and the

selected user name will

appear.

Touch the [START SEARCH] key.

HDD STATUS

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

CANCEL

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

START SEARCH

CANCEL

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

START SEARCH

SELECT USER NAME.

Suzuki

Ono

Hasegawa

Sasaki

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCDALL USERS

Yamada

Nakata

CANCEL

DIRECT ENTRY

CANCEL

START SEARCH

07-2.fm 13 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後１０時３８分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-14

The results of the user name search

appear. Touch the desired file name or

folder name.

●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing

icons.

●When a file name is touched, the operation

selection screen appears. (To perform an

operation using the file, go to step 5 on

page 7-16.)

●When a folder name is touched, all files in the

folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.

(To perform an operation using the file, go

to step 5 on page 7-16.)

●To change the order of file display, touch the

[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER

NAME] key, or [DATE] key.

If you touch a file name or folder name that

has a password, a password entry screen will

appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

[Searching by file or folder name]

Touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter the file

name or folder name to

be used for the search.

See page 7-29 to enter

characters.

Touch the [START SEARCH] key.

The results of the file or folder name

search appear. Touch the desired file

name or folder name.

●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing

icons.

●When a file name is touched, the operation

selection screen appears. (To perform an

operation using the file, go to step 5 on

page 7-16.)

●When a folder name is touched, all files in the

folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.

(To perform an operation using the file, go

to step 5 on page 7-16.)

●To change the order of file display, touch the

[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER

NAME] key, or [DATE] key.

If you touch a file name or folder name that

has a password, a password entry screen will

appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

FILE OR FOLDER NAME USER NAME

Suzuki

Tanaka

Kondou

Product SpecA

Product B

Product 2

2004/10/20

SEARCH AGAINCANCEL

DATE

USER NAME

FILE OR FOLDER NAME

CANCEL

START SEARCH

FILE OR FOLDER NAME USER NAME

SEARCH AGAINCANCEL

DATE

Yamada

Sato

Akata

Product specifications

Products

Product_info

2003/12/30

Copy_SEC.book 14 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-15

Calling up and using a saved file

A file saved with the document filing function can be called up and printed or manipulated as needed.

The following operations can be performed:

● [Print] : Print the file (page 7-17).

● [Send] : Transmit the saved file (page 7-20). The file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to

Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax. (All of these methods require installation of the appropriate options.)

(Page 1-11)

● [Property change] : Change the attribute of the saved file (page 7-21).

● [Move] : Move the file (page 7-22).

● [Delete] : Delete the file (page 7-22).

● [Detail] : Show details on the saved file (page 7-22).

■ General procedure for using a saved file

Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the

operation panel.

Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on

where the file is saved.

●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is

saved in the main folder or the custom folder.

Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the

file is saved in the Quick File folder.

If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the

files in the main folder or the folders in the

custom folder appear. If you open the wrong

folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the

[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the

correct folder.

●If the desired file is saved in the main folder,

go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a

custom folder, go to step 3.

●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]

key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.

Go to step 4.

Touch the key of the folder that contains

the desired file.

If there are more custom folder keys than can

appear in one screen, touch the or keys

to change screens.

If a password is set for the selected folder, a

password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-

digit password with the numeric keys.

Touch the desired file key.

Touch the key of the file that you wish to use.

(Parts of the screen that are framed in black are

keys that can be touched.)

A menu screen will appear.

If a password is set for the file, a password entry

screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with

the numeric keys.

DOCUMENT

FILING

IMAGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

READY

DATA

FILE

FOLDER

QUICK FILE

FOLDER

FILE RETRIEVE

HDD STATUS

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCD

CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ALL FOLDERS

MAIN FOLDER SEARCH BACK

1/1

MAIN FOLDER

SEARCHCUSTOM FOLDER BACK

FILE NAME

Basic specifications

Yamada

2003/10/20

Sato

Akata

presentaion_0903

Product_info

COPY

USER NAME

DATE

BATCH P.

Copy_SEC.book 15 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-16

Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

(1) [PRINT] key (see below)

(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)

(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)

(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22)

(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22)

(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22)

The setting screen of the selected operation

appears. See the indicated page.

File selection screen

The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.

(1) File keys

The stored files are displayed. An icon showing

which mode the file was stored from, the file name,

the user name, and the date the file was stored

appear in each file key.

When a file is touched, the job setting screen

appears.

(2) [File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key

Use these keys to change the order of display of

the file keys. When one of the keys is touched,

or appears in the key.

● When appears in the [File Name] key or [User

Name] key, the files appear by file name or user

name in ascending order.

When appears in the [Date] key, the files

appear in order from the oldest date.

● When appears in the [File Name] key or [User

Name] key, the files appear by file name or user

name in descending order.

When appears in the [Date] key, the files

appear in order from the most recent date.

(3) [Back] key

Touch this key to return to the screen one level up.

(4) Select displayed files by job type.

You can select the file keys that are displayed by

job type.

[ALL FILES] is initially selected.

Touch a tab to show a list of the files that were

stored from that mode.

(5) [Batch Print] key

Touch this key to print all files in a folder.

For detailed information on batch printing, see 7-

18.

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)

SELECT THE JOB.

MOVE

SEND

DELETE

PROPERTY

CHANGE

DETAIL

JOB SETTINGS

Basic specifications Yamada Taro

CANCEL

8 "x11"

CUSTOM FOLDER SEARCH BACK

MAIN FOLDER

Basic specifications

Yamada 2006/10/20

Products

Sato 2006/10/20

Product_info

Akata 2006/10/20

BATCH P.

ALL FILES

FILE NAME USER NAME DATE

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5)

Copy_SEC.book 16 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-17

■ [Print]

A saved file can be printed.

The screen below appears when the [PRINT] key is selected in the operation selection screen. To begin printing,

touch the [PRINT] (7) key. Printing settings can be selected in this screen before printing. The settings that were

in effect when the file was saved appear initially. The settings can be changed as needed.

(1) [PAPER SELECT] key

Use this key to set the paper size.

(2) [OUTPUT] key

Use this key to select sort, group or staple sort

functions, and to select the output tray.

(3) [2-SIDED] key

When performing two-sided printing, use this key to

select the orientation of the image on the back side

of the paper. To have the front and back images

oriented in the same direction, touch the [2-SIDED

BOOKLET] key. To have the front and back images

oriented opposite to each other, touch the [2-

SIDED TABLET] key. Note that the size and

orientation of the saved image may cause these

keys to have the opposite effect. If neither key is

selected, one-sided printing will take place.

To perform two-sided printing, the optional duplex

module is necessary.

(4) [TANDEM PRINT] key

If the conditions for tandem printing are met (page

5-10), touch this key to enable tandem printing.

See page 5-10 for more information.

When printing a file that was saved in copy mode,

this key changes to the [SPECIAL MODES] key.

The [SPECIAL MODES] include [PRINT MENU]

and [TANDEM PRINT]. For information on the print

menu, see page 5-30.

(5) [NUMBER OF PRINTS] setting key

Use this key to set the number of copies.

(6) [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key

Touch this key to print a file and then have it

automatically deleted.

(7) [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key

Touch this key to print a file. The file will not be

automatically deleted after printing.

NOTES

● When print settings are changed with this procedure, only the value for the number of copies is overwritten.

● The printing speed will be slower for image files saved using certain resolution settings. (See page 7-31.)

PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA

PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA

NUMBER OF PRINTS

CANCEL

(1~999)

PAPER SELECT

TANDEM PRINT

2-SIDED

OUTPUT

AUTO

JOB SETTINGS / PRINT

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro

8 x11

SPECIAL MODES

2-SIDED

(1)

(2)

(4) (5) (6) (7)

(3)

Copy_SEC.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-18

■ Batch printing

All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once.

Touch the [BATCH P.] key in the file list

screen of document filing mode.

To print all files of a

specific type of job,

touch the desired job

tab. The files shown on

that tab can be printed

as a batch.

Touch the [USER NAME] key.

Touch the user name of the files that you

wish to print by batch printing.

If a password has been established, touch

the [PASSWORD] key.

Enter the password with

the numeric keys (5 to 8

digits) and touch the

[OK] key. Only files that

have the same

password will be

selected.

If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the

next step.

To set the number of copies, touch the

[CHANGE PRT.NO.] key.

If you wish to use the

number of copies stored

with each file, go to step

Touch the [APPLY THE NUMBER FROM

STORED SETTING OF EACH JOB]

checkbox to remove the checkmark.

Set the number of copies with the

keys.

The number of copies

can be also set with the

numeric keys.

NOTE

When [SELECTION OF [ALL USERS] IS NOT

ALLOWED.] checkbox and [SELECTION OF [USER

UNKNOWN] IS NOT ALLOWED.] checkbox are

disabled in the administrator settings, the [ALL

USERS] key and [USER UNKNOWN] key can be

selected.

The [ALL USERS] key can be touched to select all

files in the folder (the files of all users).

The [USER UNKNOWN] key can be touched to

select all files in the folder that do not have a user

name.

2006/01/01

BATCH P.

USER NAME

PASSWORD

ALL FILES

BATCH PRINT

SELECT USER NAME.

ALL USERS

Hasegawa

Ono

Suzuki

USER UNKNOWN

CANCEL

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCDALL USERS

Nakata

Yamada

Sasaki

USER NAME

PASSWORD

Suzuki

CHANGE PRT.NO.

NT AND DELETE THE DATA

APPLY THE NUMBER FRO

EACH JOB

R FROM STORED SETTING OF

Copy_SEC.book 18 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-19

Touch the [OK] key.

Touch the [PRINT AND DELETE THE

DATA] key or the [PRINT AND SAVE THE

DATA] key.

If the [PRINT AND

DELETE THE DATA] key

is touched, the files will

be automatically deleted

after printing.

If the [PRINT AND SAVE

THE DATA] key is

touched, the files will be saved after printing.

If there are no files that match the search

conditions, you will return to the file list screen.

CANCEL OK

PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA

PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA

NOTES

● If "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings for copy mode, print mode, or document filing mode,

it will not be possible to perform batch printing of [ALL FILES].

● To display the job tab of a mode for which "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings, the account

number must be entered.

Copy_SEC.book 19 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-20

■ [Send]

A saved file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax.

These transmission methods require installation of the appropriate options.

The following screen appears when the [SEND] key is touched. Select the destination and other settings required

for transmission and then touch the [SEND] (10) key to transmit the file. Transmission settings include the

resolution and transmission functions such as a timer setting. Change or select these settings as needed.

(1) [RESOLUTION] key

Use this key to set the resolution.

(2) [FILE FORMAT] key

The [FILE FORMAT] key appears in scan mode

(Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Network

Folder). Touch this key to set the file format of scan

images that you transmit.

(3) [FILE NAME/USER NAME] display

This shows the file name and user name of the file

to be transmitted.

(4) [ ] key (Speed dial key)

Use this key to specify a destination by entering the

3-digit number that is assigned to an e-mail

address or fax number when it is stored in a one-

touch key or group key.

(5) [MODE SWITCH] key

Use this key to select the transmission mode (Scan

to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder,

fax, or Internet fax).

(6) [CANCEL] key

Touch this key to return to the operation selection

screen.

(7) [ADDRESS BOOK] key

Touch this key to display the destinations stored in

the directory.

(8) [ADDRESS REVIEW] key

Touch this key to display the destinations.

(9) [SPECIAL MODES] key

Touch this key to display the special function menu.

The functions that can be selected vary depending

on the transmission mode:

● Scan to E-mail/FTP/Network Folder

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

● FAX

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

FAX OWN ADDRESS SENDING: Your sender's

information can be included on the fax pages

printed out by the receiving machine.

TRANSACTION REPORT: A transaction report

can be printed based on the specified conditions

after a transaction ends.

● Internet FAX

TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.

I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND: Your sender's

information can be included on the Internet fax

pages printed out by the receiving machine.

TRANSACTION REPORT: A transaction report

can be printed based on the specified conditions

after a transaction ends.

(10)

[SEND] key

Touch this key after selecting transmission settings

to begin transmission. (The [START] key can also

be pressed to begin transmission.)

NOTE

Jobs that use the following special functions cannot be transmitted when called up. (The [SEND] key is grayed out

in the operation selection screen.)

Pamphlet copying, covers/insert, card shot, Multi shot.

Jobs that use the following functions can be transmitted with certain restrictions when called up:

Card shot:Can be transmitted if saved by scan save or image send.

Multi shot (2in1):Can be transmitted if saved as 2in1 using a portrait original.

CANCEL

ADDRESS BOOK

ADDRESS REVIEW

SPECIAL MODES

MODE SWITCH

E-MAIL/FTP

RESOLUTION

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro

200x200dpi

FILE FORMAT

PDF NONE

ADDRESS ENTRY

SEND SETTINGS

SEND

READY TO SEND

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) (5) (6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)(12)

[Example of E-MAIL/FTP mode]

Copy_SEC.book 20 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-21

(11)

[SEND SETTINGS] key

[SEND SETTINGS] key is displayed in scanner

mode and Internet FAX mode.

Touch this key to set the subject and file name. In

scanner mode, the sender name can also be set.

(12)

[SUB ADDRESS] key or [ADDRESS ENTRY] key

● Touch this key to directly enter the destination for

a Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network

Folder or Internet fax transmission.

● Touch this key to enter the sub-address and

passcode for an F-code fax transmission.

■ [Property change]

Select this operation to change the attribute of a saved file. Three attributes are available: [SHARING],

[PROTECT], and [ CONFIDENTIAL].

The following screen appears when the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key is selected in the operation selection screen.

Note the restrictions below on changing the attribute.

[Restrictions on changing the attribute]

●A file that is set to [SHARING] can be

changed to [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

However, a [SHARING] file that is saved in the

Quick File folder can only be changed to

[PROTECT].

●A file that is set to [PROTECT] can be

changed to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

However, a [PROTECT] file that is saved in

the Quick File folder can only be changed to

[SHARING].

●A file that is saved in the Quick File folder

cannot be changed to [CONFIDENTIAL].

Touch the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key in

the operation selection screen.

Touch the key of the desired attribute.

If you are changing a

[SHARING] or

[PROTECT] file to

[CONFIDENTIAL],

touch the [PASSWORD]

key and enter the

password.

Touch the [OK] key.

NOTE

See the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" and "Operation manual (for image send)" for detailed explanations of

(1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9), (11), and (12).

JOB SETTINGS / PROPERTY CHANGE

Basic specifications Yamada Taro

8 x11

CANCEL OK

SHARING

CONFIDENTIAL

PROTECT

PASSWORD

PROPERTY

CHANGE

DETAIL

SHARING

CONFIDENTIAL

PROTECT

PASSWORD

NCEL

Copy_SEC.book 21 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-22

■ [Move]

This operation is used to move a file to a different

folder.

The following screen appears when the [MOVE]

key is selected.

Only [SHARING] and [CONFIDENTIAL] files can

be moved. A [PROTECT] file can be moved by first

using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the

attribute to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].

Touch the [MOVE TO:] key and select the

folder to which you wish to move the file.

●Select the main folder or a folder in the

custom folder. A file cannot be moved to the

Quick File folder.

●The file name can be changed when moving a

file. To change the name, touch the [FILE

NAME] key and enter the desired file name.

See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering

characters.

Touch the [OK] key.

Touch the [MOVE] key.

Touch the [CANCEL] key.

You will return to the

operation selection

screen.

■ [Delete]

This operation is used to delete the selected file.

Touch the [DELETE] key in the operation select

screen. A message asking you to confirm the

deletion will appear. Touch the [YES] key to delete

the file.

Only [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be

deleted. (A [PROTECT] file can be deleted by first

using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the

attribute to [SHARING].)

■ [Detail]

This operation is used to show detailed information

on the selected file.

Touch the [DETAIL] key to display the information.

The information appears on two screens. Touch the

key or key to move between the two

screens.

The file name can be changed in the information

screen. To change the name, touch the [FILE

NAME] key and enter the desired file name in the

character entry screen that appears. See page 7-

29 for the procedure for entering characters.

JOB SETTINGS / MOVE

SELECT THE FOLDER THE FILE IS MOVED TO.

FILE NAME

MOVE TO:

CANCEL

Basic specifications

Yamada Taro A4

MOVE

8 x11

N FOLDER OK

OVED TO.

ations

amada Taro A4

MOVE

CANCEL

aro A4

8 x11

Copy_SEC.book 22 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

CALLING UP AND USING A FILE

7-23

■ Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen

Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions appear as keys in the finished job status screen.

You can view information on a file that appears in this screen and manipulate the file.

Press the [JOB STATUS] key.

The job status screen

appears.

Touch the [COMPLETE] key.

The finished job screen

appears.

Touch the key of the desired file.

If there are more keys

than can appear in one

screen and the desired

file does not appear,

touch the key or

key to change

screens.

The touched key is highlighted.

To view information on the file, touch the

[DETAIL] key.

Use the keys

to change screens.

When you are finished,

touch the [OK] key to

return to the screen of step

Touch the [CALL] key.

The operation selection

screen appears.

Select and perform the desired operation as

explained in "Calling up and using a saved file"

(page 7-15).

AGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

DATA

JOB QUEUE

DETAIL

1/8

COMPLETE

JOBS COMPLETED

Suzuki7890123456 14:09 12/09 00

COPY 13:27 12/09 00

COPY 14:38 12/09 00

Tanaka7890123456 14:38 12/09 01

SET TIME

NUM

DETAIL

CALL

INTERNET FAXX JOB

FILE NAME:

DETAIL OF

COPY

COPY_20041021_153050

SIZE:8 x11

DATE:2004/10/10 15:30

RESOLUTION:600x600dpi

PAGES:10

CALL

1/2

FILE NAME

DETAIL OF

DATA SIZE: 21,987,543KB

1-SIDED

OUTPUT:

SPECIAL

MODES:

DOCUMENT

STYLE:

FILE FORMAT:

COPY_20041021_153050

CALL

COPY

2/2

CALL

INTERNET-FAXX JOB

Copy_SEC.book 23 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

7-24

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders

This section explains how to create, edit, and delete user names and custom folders for saving files with the

document filing function. User names and custom folders are created and edited at the operation panel of the

machine or in the Web page.

■ General procedure for creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders

Follow steps 1 to 3 below to create, edit, or delete a user name or custom folder. In step 3, select the key for the

specific operation that you wish to perform.

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL]

key.

Touch the key of the operation that you

wish to perform.

Go to the page indicated below for the selected

operation.

(1) [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key

Program a user name. (See the next page)

(2) [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] key

Edit or delete a user name. (See page 7-26)

(3) [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key

Create a custom folder. (See page 7-27)

(4) [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER] key

Edit or delete a custom folder. (See page 7-28)

NOTES

● A previously stored name cannot be used when creating a new user name or custom folder. However, the same

password can be used more than once.

● A password cannot be omitted when creating a user name.

AGE SEND

COPY

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

LINE

DATA

DEFAULT

SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

ADMINISTRATOR

ADDRESS CONTROL

TOTAL COUNT

DOCUMENT FILING

CONTROL

SYSTEM SETTINGS

DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL

USER NAME REGISTRATION

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

Copy_SEC.book 24 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-25

■ Programming a user name

To program a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key in

step 3, and then follow these steps:

Touch the [USER NAME] key.

The lowest number that

has not yet been

programmed appears

automatically in "No.".

Touch the number to

display a character entry

screen and enter a user

name (maximum of 16 characters). See page 7-29

for the procedure for entering characters.

Touch the [INITIAL] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter up to 10

search characters.

See

page 7-29 for the

procedure for entering

characters.

Touch the [PASSWORD] key.

A password cannot be

omitted.

Set a password for the user name (enter a

5-digit password with the numeric keys).

This will be the password

for the user name

entered in step 1.

As each digit is entered,

" changes to " ". If

you make a mistake,

press the [C] key and

then enter the correct number.

Touch the [OK] key.

If you wish to specify a folder for the user

name, touch the [STORED TO:] key. If you

wish to use the main folder, go to step 8.

The folders that have been created appear.

Touch the desired folder. If you wish to

create a new folder, or if no folders have

been created, touch the [ADD NEW] key.

If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a

name for the folder as explained on page 7-27.

The user name programmed in step 1 is selected

as the user name of the folder.

Touch the [EXIT] key.

You will return to the

"USER NAME

REGISTRATION"

screen.

"REGISTRATION IS

COMPLETED." will

appear highlighted next

to "No.".

To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To program

another user name, touch the [NEXT] key.

If you touched the [EXIT]

key, you will return to the

screen of step 3 on page

7-24. If you touched the

[NEXT] key, a new user

entry screen will appear.

Repeat steps 1 to 9 to

program a new user.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

No.001

USER NAME

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE F

INITIAL

R THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

No.001

USER NAME

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FIL

Yamada

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

EXIT

10-KEY PAD.

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

No.001

USER NAME

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

STORED TO:

ALL FOLDERS

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS

UVWXY

MAIN FOLDER ADD NEW

1/1

– – – – –

EXIT

INITIAL

EXIT

WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

Yamada

Copy_SEC.book 25 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-26

■ Editing and deleting a user name

To edit or delete a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow these steps:

Touch the [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME]

key.

Touch the [USER NAME] key that you wish

to edit or delete.

A password entry screen will appear.

Enter the 5-digit password with the

numeric keys.

After entering the password, the following screen

will appear.

● To edit a user name, perform steps 4 and 5.

● To delete a user name, perform steps 6 and 7.

[Editing]

Touch the key of each item that you wish to

edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 9 in

"Programming a user name" on page 7-

25).

When you have finished

editing the items,

"REGISTRATION IS

COMPLETED." will

appear highlighted next

to "NO.".

When you have finished editing the

desired items, touch the [EXIT] key.

To edit another user

name, repeat steps 2 to

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

[Deleting]

Touch the [DELETE] key.

Touch the [YES] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2. To

delete another user

name, repeat steps 2, 3

and 6.

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

SELECT USER NAME TO AMEND/DELETE.

Suzuki

Ono

Hasegawa

Sasaki

EXIT

UVWXYZOPQRSTJKLMNEFGHIABCD

ALL USERS

Yamada

Nakata

1/1

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

BCD

EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

USER NAME INITIAL Yamada

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.

DELETE EXIT

NOTE

When a user name is changed, the change is not

updated to any previously saved data (files or

folders).

USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

USER NAME INIT

Yamada

MAIN FOLDER

PASSWORD

STORED TO:

SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH

ITIAL Yamada

THIS USER NAME IS STORED

DELETE

EXIT

ITIAL Yamada

H THIS USER NAME IS STORED

DELETE EXIT

DELETE THE USER NAME?

Yamada

YES

Copy_SEC.book 26 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-27

■ Creating a custom folder

Up to 500 custom folders can be created. When no further folders can be created, delete unneeded folders (page

7-28) and then create a new folder. A password can be omitted when creating a folder. To create a custom folder,

follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow

the steps below.

Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key.

The lowest number that

has not yet been

programmed appears

automatically in "No.".

Touch the number to

display a character entry

screen and enter a folder

name (maximum of 28 characters). See page 7-29

for the procedure for entering characters.

Touch the [INITIAL] key.

A character entry screen

appears. Enter up to 10

search characters.

See

page 7-29 for the

procedure for entering

characters.

If you wish to set a password for the new

folder, touch the [PASSWORD] key.

A password can be

omitted.

If you are omitting a

password, go to step 6.

Set a password for the folder (enter a 5-

digit password with the numeric keys).

This will be the password

for the folder name

entered in step 1.

Touch the [OK] key.

Touch the [USER NAME] key.

You will select a user

name that will be

associated with the

folder name you are

programming.

Selection of a user name

cannot be omitted.

The programmed user names appear.

Touch the desired user name. If you do not

wish to use any of the user names that

appear, touch the [ADD NEW] key to

program a new user name.

When you touch a user name, a password entry

screen appears.

If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a user

name as explained on page 7-25. The folder name

programmed in step 1 will be selected as the folder

for the user.

Enter the 5-digit password of the selected

user name with the numeric keys.

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

USER NAME

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

USER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

No.001

FOLDER NAME

INITIAL

USER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

PASSWORD

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

EXIT

10-KEY PAD.

No.001

FOLDER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

INITIAL

USER1

USER NAME

PAS

CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION

SELECT USER NAME.

ALL FOLDERS

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST

UVWXYZ

ADD NEW

1/1

Suzuki Sasaki

Nakata

Yamada

Hasegawa

Ono

ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.

CANCEL

BCD

EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ

Copy_SEC.book 27 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

SYSTEM SETTINGS

7-28

Touch the [OK] key.

To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To create

another folder, touch the [NEXT] key.

If you touched the [EXIT]

key, you will return to the

screen of step 3 on page

7-24. If you touched the

[NEXT] key, a new folder

screen will appear.

Repeat steps 1 to 10 to

create a new folder.

■ Editing/deleting a custom folder

To edit a previously created folder (change the folder name, initial, password, or user name), or to delete a folder,

follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow the steps below.

Touch the [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM

FOLDER] key.

Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key that you

wish to edit or delete.

If a password has been set for the folder, a

password entry screen will appear. Enter the

correct 5-digit password with the numeric keys.

Edit or delete the folder.

●To edit the folder, perform steps 4 and 5.

●To delete the folder, perform steps 6 and 7.

●To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.

[Editing]

Touch the key of each item that you wish to

edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 10 of

"Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27).

After editing the items and returning to the screen of

step 3, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will be

highlighted to the right of "No.".

To stop using a password, touch the

[PASSWORD] key and then touch the [OK] key

without entering anything for the password. [-] will

appear and the password will be canceled.

When you have finished editing the items,

touch the [EXIT] key.

To edit another folder, repeat steps 2 to 5.

[Deleting]

Touch the [DELETE] key.

Touch the [YES] key.

You will return to the

screen of step 2.

To delete another folder,

repeat steps 2, 6, and 7.

To exit, touch the [EXIT]

key in the screen of step

JKLMN OPQRST

UVWXYZ

ADD NEW

1/1

SWORD

EXIT

When deleting a folder...

A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.

: [MOVE] (see page 7-22) : [DELETE] (see page 7-22)

AMEND/DELETE USER NAME

AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER

CUSTOM FOLDER 1

CUSTOM FOLDER 3

CUSTOM FOLDER 5

CUSTOM FOLDER 7

ALL FOLDERS

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

SELECT CUSTOM FOLDER TO AMEND/DELETE.

CUSTOM FOLDER 6

CUSTOM FOLDER 8

CUSTOM FOLDER 4

CUSTOM FOLDER 2

ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST

UVWXYZ

EXIT

1/2

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

No.001

FOLDER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

INITIAL

USER1

*****

Yamada

USER NAME

EXITDELETE

PASSWORD

No.001

FOLDER NAME

USER FOLDER 1

INITIAL

USER1

Yamada

USER NAME

EXITDELETE

PASSWORD

REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.

CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE

– – – – –

EXIT

ORD

DELETE

DELETE THE FOLDER?

USER FOLDER 1

YES

Copy_SEC.book 28 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

7-29

ENTERING CHARACTERS

To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.

Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.

■ Entering alphabetical characters

(Example: Sharp äÄ)

Touch the [S] key.

To switch between upper case and lower case,

touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is

highlighted, upper case letters are entered.

Touch the [ABC abc] key.

Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and [p]

key.

If you make a mistake, touch the key to move

the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the

correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab

12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or

symbol.

Touch the [SPACE] key.

The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is

entered.

Touch the [ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key.

Touch the [ä] key.

To switch between upper case and lower case,

touch the [ÃÄÂ ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is

highlighted, lower case letters are entered.

Touch the [ÃÄÂ ãäâ] key.

Touch the [Ä] key.

You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to

return to alphabetical character entry. You can

also enter numbers and symbols.

When finished, touch the [OK] key.

You will exit the character entry screen and return

to the programming screen. If you touch the

[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming

screen without storing the entered characters.

Characters cannot be

entered beyond the " " mark.

Shar

Sharp

Sharp ä

Sharp äÄ

Copy_SEC.book 29 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

ENTERING CHARACTERS

7-30

■ Entering numbers and symbols

Touch the [AB/ab 12#$%] key.

When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted,

number/symbol entry mode is selected.

Enter the desired number or symbol.

Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as

follows:

Screen 1/2

Screen 2/2

Change screens by touching the key or key

displayed in the screen. If you make a mistake,

touch the key to move the cursor ( ) back one

space and then enter the correct character.

You can continue touching keys to enter

characters. You can also touch another character

type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key or [AB/ab

12#$%] key) to enter characters other than

numbers and symbols.

When you have finished entering

characters, touch the [OK] key.

You will exit the character entry screen and return

to the programming screen. If you touch the

[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming

screen without storing the entered characters.

NOTE

The following symbols cannot be used when

entering a file name or folder name.

Depending on the environment of use of the OS, it

may not be possible to use spaces and the symbols

indicated below.

For example, hyperlinks will not operate correctly or

nonsense characters may appear.

$ % ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ ` { } _

1&1

\?/";:,

<> ! * |&#

07-3.fm 30 ページ２００７年３月１４日　水曜日　午前１１時２３分

7-31

TROUBLESHOOTING

This section explains problems frequently encountered when using the document filing function. If you experience

any difficulty, refer to the following table. For information on general machine problems, printer problems, fax

problems, and network scanner problems, please see the troubleshooting sections of the appropriate manuals.

Problem Check Cause and solution

A saved file has

disappeared.

Was the file called up and then printed by

touching the [PRINT AND DELETE THE

DATA] key?

A file that is printed using the [PRINT AND

DELETE THE DATA] key is automatically

deleted after being printed. To print a file

without deleting it, use the [PRINT AND

SAVE THE DATA] key.

A file cannot be

deleted.

Is the file's attribute set to [PROTECT]? A file cannot be deleted when its attribute is

set to [PROTECT]. Change the attribute to

[SHARING] and then delete the file.

A file's attribute

cannot be set to

[CONFIDENTIAL].

Is the file in the main or custom folder? A file in the Quick File folder cannot be set to

[CONFIDENTIAL]. Move the file to a

different folder or set it to [PROTECT].

A file's attribute

cannot be changed

to [PROTECT].

Is the file set to [CONFIDENTIAL]? A file cannot be simultaneously set to

[CONFIDENTIAL] and [PROTECT]. If set to

[CONFIDENTIAL], use [PROPERTY

CHANGE] (page 7-21) to change the

attribute to [PROTECT].

A name in the Quick

File folder is cut off.

Was the name programmed in the advanced

transmission settings?

If the name was programmed in the

advanced transmission settings before the

file was saved in the Quick File folder, that

name will be used. However, if the name is

longer than the maximum name length of the

Quick File folder (30 characters), the excess

characters will be discarded.

Resolution settings

are not possible.

Was the file saved at low resolution? A saved file cannot be transmitted at a

resolution higher than the resolution at

which it was saved.

A file name cannot

be stored or

changed.

Have you entered prohibited characters in

the file name?

Certain characters (symbols) cannot be

used in file names. See "ENTERING

CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and

symbols) on page 7-29.

A custom folder

name cannot be

stored or changed.

Have you entered prohibited characters in

the folder name?

Certain characters (symbols) cannot be

used in folder names. See "ENTERING

CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and

symbols) on page 7-29.

The printing speed

of a saved file is

slow.

The file was saved using one of the following

resolution settings:

●

200 x 200 dpi resolution.

●

STANDARD (200 x 100 dpi) or FINE (200

x 200 dpi)

When a file is saved using one of the

resolutions setting at left, the printing speed

will be slower than when other resolution

settings are used.

Black dots appear

when a file that was

saved with the

document filing

function is printed.

Was the file saved at other than the following

resolutions?

●

600 x 600 dpi

●

600 x 600 dpi and HALF TONE

To check the resolution of the saved file, touch

the [DETAIL] key in step 5 on page 7-16.

This problem can be alleviated by setting the

resolution to 600x600dpi when saving a file

with scan save.

The problem can be further alleviated by

selecting HALF TONE after setting the

resolution to 600x600dpi, as light images

will be printed lightly.

Copy_SEC.book 31 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 32 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

8-1

CHAPTER 8

SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter contains useful information about the machine.

Page

SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 8-2

LIST OF COMBINATION OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES.......................... 8-4

INDEX ..................................................................................................... 8-5

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

8-2

SPECIFICATIONS

Automatic document feeder

* Maximum of 15 sheets when originals are heavier than 28 lbs.(105 g/m

)

. If the number of placed sheets exceeds

this, scanning of the originals will not take place correctly and an extended image may result.

Type Console

Print system Electrophotographic system

Photoconductive type OPC drum

Developer system Dry-type two-component magnetic brush development

Fusing system Heater roller

Resolution Scan: 600 x 600 dpi, output: 600 x 600 dpi

Gradation 256 levels

Originals Sheets, bound documents

Maximum size: 11" x 17" or A3

Copy paper Plain paper and special papers

Copy sizes Max. 11" x 17" or A3, min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R or A5R, Postcard

Image loss: Max 21/64" or 8 mm (leading edge and trailing edge in total),

max. 21/64" or 8 mm (along all other edges in total)

Warm-up time 80 seconds or less

First-copy time

MX-M350N/MX-M350U

4.9 seconds or less*

MX-M450N/MX-M450U

4.4 seconds or less*

* Conditions: The document glass is used and A4 size paper is fed horizontally from

the machine tray (tray 1).

Copy ratio Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps

Fixed presets: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200% and 400% for

inch system, 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200% and

400% for AB system.

Continuous copy 999 copies

Dimensions

33-1/16" (W) x 26-11/64" (D) x 44-23/64" (H)

(840 mm (W) x 665 mm (D) x 1127 mm (H))

(including automatic document feeder)

Weight Approx. 241.0 lbs. (Approx. 109.3 kg)

(when the duplex module/bypass tray is installed)

Overall dimensions 40-37/64" (W) x 26-11/64"(D) (1031 mm (W) x 665 mm (D))

(when the duplex module/bypass tray is installed)

Required power supply AC120V±10%, 60Hz

Power consumption 1.44 kW

Operating conditions Temperature: 50°F to 86°F (10°C to 30°C)

Humidity: 20% to 85%

Name B/W scanner module/DSPF

Original size 11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A3 to A5)

Weight of originals 14 to 34 lbs. (50 to 128 g/m

)

Number of originals Maximum 50 sheets (maximum 30 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" (A3 or B4) size

sheets*), stack height must not exceed the heights indicated below.

14 to 21 lbs. (50 to 80 g/m

): 17/64" (6.5 mm) or less

21 to 34 lbs. (80 to 128 g/m

): 13/64" (5 mm) or less

Power supply Supplied from machine

Dimensions

32-7/16" (W) x 25-33/64" (D) x 7-31/64" (H) (824 mm (W) x 648 mm (D) x 190 mm (H))

Weight Approx.

46.8 lbs. (21.2 k

)

Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.

08.fm 2 ページ２００６年１２月２０日　水曜日　午後８時３２分

SPECIFICATIONS

8-3

Continuous copying speed (when the offset function is not used)

MX-M350N/MX-M350U MX-M450N/MX-M450U

Copy paper size 100% / Reduced / Enlarged

11" x 17" (A3) 17 copies/min. 20 copies/min.

8-1/2" x 14" (B4) 20 copies/min. 22 copies/min.

8-1/2" x 11" (A4) 35 copies/min. 45 copies/min.

8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R) 25 copies/min. 30 copies/min.

7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (B5) 35 copies/min. 45 copies/min.

7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R (B5R) 25 copies/min. 30 copies/min.

8-1/2" x 5-1/2"R (A5R) 35 copies/min. 45 copies/min.

Center tray specifications

Output method Face-down output

Maximum number

of sheets

(20lbs. (80g/m

)

/recommended

paper)

400 sheets*

Paper type Plain paper and special paper

* The maximum number of pages that can be held varies

depending on ambient conditions in the installation

location, the type of paper, and the storage conditions of

the paper.

Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779)

Printing mode Standby mode

Sound power level

LwA 6.8B or less 5.0B or less

Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL-UZ85: Edition Mar. 2002)

Ozone 0.02 mg/m

or less

Dust 0.075 mg/m

or less

Styrene 0.07 mg/m

or less

Copy_SEC.book 3 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

8-4

LIST OF COMBINATION OF

PERIPHERAL DEVICES

The table below shows the possible system configurations. Some devices require the installation of others (B) to be

functional and some cannot be installed together (A).

Related to paper feed unit

(B)

(A)

Multi purpose drawer

Stand/3 x 500 sheet

paper drawer

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

paper drawer

Saddle stitch finisher

Finisher

Mail-bin stacker

Exit tray

Punch unit

Duplex module/bypass tray

Duplex module

Multi purpose drawer

Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet

Duplex module/bypass tray

Duplex module

Upper exit tray extension

Saddle stitch finisher

Finisher

Mail-bin stacker

Exit tray

Punch unit

Upper exit tray extension

Output units

= ( ) and ( ) must be installed together.

= ( ) requires installation of one of the ( ) units.

= Cannot be installed together.

Copy_SEC.book 4 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

8-5

INDEX

[ ] key................................................................. 1-13

[#/P] key ............................................................... 1-13

■ Numerics

1-sided copy

-Automatic document feeder ............................... 4-7

-Document glass ............................................... 4-11

2in1 ............................................................. 5-24, 7-12

2-sided copy.........................................1-3, 4-10, 4-13

■ A

LOGOUT .............................................................. 1-13

[LOGOUT] key............................................. 1-13, 1-18

Acceptable originals ............................................... 4-2

Account number ................................................... 1-18

Additional fax memory.......................................... 1-12

Address control .................................................... 2-12

Adjusting the exposure.................................. 1-3, 4-14

Administrator settings........................................... 2-12

All custom setting list............................................ 2-14

Applicable plain paper............................................ 2-4

Applicable special media........................................ 2-4

Application communication module............. 1-12, 3-25

Application integration module ............................. 1-12

Applicable special media........................................ 2-4

Attributes ................................................................ 7-3

Auditing mode ...................................................... 1-18

Auto image ........................................................... 4-15

Auto power shut-off mode ...................................... 1-8

Automatic copy image rotation............................... 4-4

Automatic document feeder ................... 1-9, 2-22, 4-2

-1-sided copies.................................................... 4-7

-Acceptable originals........................................... 4-2

-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-10

-Misfeed original................................................ 2-22

-Setting originals ................................................. 4-3

-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2

Automatic exposure adjustment ........................... 4-14

Automatic selection .............................................. 4-15

Automatic two-sided copying

-Automatic document feeder ............................. 4-10

-Document glass ............................................... 4-13

Automatic two-sided printing .................................. 2-4

■ B

B/W reverse............................................ 1-6, 5-2, 5-29

Barcode font kit .................................................... 1-12

Binding change ........................................... 4-10, 4-13

Book copy ..............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-26

Book original .......................................................... 5-5

Bypass tray....................................1-9, 2-19, 3-2, 4-20

Bypass tray extension ............................................ 3-3

■ C

[C] key ........................................................... 1-13, 7-4

[CA] key......................................................... 1-13, 7-4

Call for service ..................................................... 2-23

[CALL] key............................................................ 1-16

Calling up and using a file .................................... 7-13

Calling up and using a saved file.......................... 7-15

-Delete............................................................... 7-22

-Detail................................................................ 7-22

-Move ................................................................ 7-22

-Print.................................................................. 7-17

-Property change .............................................. 7-21

-Send................................................................. 7-20

Card shot.......................................1-6, 5-2, 5-27, 7-12

Cartridge lock lever .............................................. 1-10

Center erase........................................................... 5-4

Center tray.......................................................1-9, 4-9

[CENTER TRAY] key............................................ 3-18

Changing the paper size in paper tray ................... 2-2

Charger cleaner ..................................................... 6-2

Clear all key................................................... 1-13, 7-4

Clear key .......................................................1-13, 7-4

Clock .................................................................... 2-12

Confidential ............................................................ 7-3

Contents....................................................... 0-6 to 0-7

Continuous copying speed ..................................... 8-3

[COPY] key........................................................... 1-13

Covers/inserts ........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-12

Creating a custom folder ...................................... 7-27

Custom folder...........................7-3, 7-24, 7-27 to 7-28

■ D

Data security kit.................................................... 1-12

Date print..............................................1-6, 5-30, 5-33

Default settings..................................................... 2-14

[DETAIL] key......................................................... 1-16

Display contrast.................................................... 2-14

Display switching keys.......................................... 1-16

Disposal of hole punch scrap ............................... 3-21

Document feeder tray......................................4-2, 4-3

Document filing control......................................... 2-12

Document filing function..................................1-8, 7-1

Document filing user / folder list ........................... 2-14

[DOCUMENT FILING] key ............................1-13, 7-4

Document glass

-1-sided copies.................................................. 4-11

-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-13

-Placing originals................................................. 4-3

-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2

Dual page copy ........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-5

DUAL PAGE SCAN .............................................. 7-12

Duplex module ..............................1-9, 1-11, 2-19, 3-2

Duplex module/bypass tray ........................... 1-11, 3-2

Duplex module side cover .................................... 1-10

■ E

Editing and deleting

-Custom folder................................................... 7-28

-User names...................................................... 7-26

Energy saving features........................................... 1-8

Energy Star guidelines ........................................... 1-8

Enlargement......................................................... 4-15

Entering characters ..................................7-29 to 7-30

Erase...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-4, 7-12

Copy_SEC.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

INDEX

8-6

Examples of covers and inserts ............... 5-17 to 5-22

-Covers.................................................. 5-18 to 5-21

-Inserts .............................................................. 5-22

External account module............................. 1-12, 3-27

Exit tray ..................................................1-9, 1-11, 3-2

■ F

Facsimile expansion kit ........................................ 1-12

Fax data receive/forward...................................... 2-12

[FAX JOB] key ...................................................... 1-16

Features ................................................................. 1-3

[FILE FOLDER] key................................................ 7-5

Finisher ......................................................... 1-11, 3-7

Finisher compiler.................................................. 3-11

Flash ROM kit ...................................................... 1-12

Front cover .............................................1-9, 3-5, 3-14

Fusing unit..........................................1-10, 2-17, 2-18

Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers..................... 2-9

■ G

General procedure for using special functions....... 5-2

Grayed out............................................................ 1-14

Group ..............................................1-3, 3-8, 3-18, 4-9

[GROUP] key................................................. 3-9, 3-18

■ H

[HDD STATUS] key................................................. 7-5

Heavy paper.................................................... 2-3, 2-4

Highlighted ........................................................... 1-14

Hole punching ............................................... 1-8, 3-17

■ I

Icon ......................................................1-14, 5-17, 7-5

[IMAGE SEND] key .............................................. 1-13

Information ........................................................... 2-17

Installation requirements ........................................ 0-3

Interior.................................................................. 1-10

Internet fax expansion kit ..................................... 1-12

[INTERNET-FAX] key ........................................... 1-16

Interrupting a copy run .................................. 1-7, 5-44

■ J

Job build..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-8, 7-12

Job programs ....................................1-6, 5-42 to 5-43

-Calling up......................................................... 5-43

-Deleting............................................................ 5-43

-Storing ............................................................. 5-42

Job status screen................................................. 1-15

[JOB STATUS] key ............................................... 1-13

■ K

Keyboard select.................................................... 2-14

■ L

Labels..................................................................... 2-3

Landscape.............................................................. 1-2

Latch ...................................................................... 3-7

List print................................................................ 2-14

Loading paper ........................................................ 2-2

-Bypass tray ........................................................ 3-3

-Multi purpose drawer ......................................... 2-8

-Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................... 2-10

-Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer .......... 2-11

-Tray 1 ................................................................. 2-2

■ M

Mail bins ................................................................. 3-5

Mail-bin stacker .............................................1-11, 3-5

Main charger .......................................................... 6-2

Main features................................................1-3 to 1-8

Main folder.............................................................. 7-3

Main screen............................................................ 5-2

Manual exposure adjustment ............................... 4-14

Manual selection .................................................. 4-16

Margin shift...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-3

Meaning of "R" ....................................................... 1-2

Mirror image ...........................................1-6, 5-2, 5-28

Misfeed............... 2-17 to 2-22, 3-6, 3-12, 3-22 to 3-23

Misfeed in the paper feed area................. 2-20 to 2-21

Misfeed original .................................................... 2-22

Misfeed removal ................................................... 2-17

-Automatic document feeder ............................. 2-22

-Bypass tray ...................................................... 2-19

-Duplex module ................................................. 2-19

-Finisher ............................................................ 3-12

-Saddle stitch finisher........................................ 3-22

-Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................... 2-21

-Transport area, fusing area, and exit area ....... 2-18

-Tray 1 ............................................................... 2-20

Mode select key ................................................... 1-15

Mode select keys........................................... 1-13, 7-4

Multi purpose drawer.......................1-9, 1-11, 2-3, 2-8

Multi shot................................................1-5, 5-2, 5-24

■ N

Network expansion kit .......................................... 1-12

Network scanner expansion kit ............................ 1-12

Non-standard sizes ...........................2-3, 2-5, 2-6, 4-5

Number of pages printed...................................... 1-18

number of pages transmitted (scanned)............... 1-18

Numeric keys.................................................1-13, 7-4

■ O

Offset......................................................1-7, 3-8, 3-15

[OFFSET] key................................................ 3-9, 3-18

Offset tray......................................................3-7, 3-14

Operation panel............................................. 1-9, 1-13

-Document filing function..................................... 7-4

Original guides ....................................................... 4-3

Original orientation ........................................3-16, 4-4

Original size .............................................4-2, 4-5, 4-6

Output ...........................................3-9, 3-18, 4-9, 4-12

Output tray.............................................................. 4-9

Copy_SEC.book 6 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

INDEX

8-7

■ P

Page numbering.......................1-7, 5-30, 5-35 to 5-38

Pamphlet copy..........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-6

Paper curled......................................................... 2-24

Paper tray...................................................... 1-9, 2-20

Paper tray settings ........................................ 2-5, 2-14

Part names

-Duplex module................................................... 3-2

-Exterior .............................................................. 1-9

-Finisher .............................................................. 3-7

-Interior.............................................................. 1-10

-Mail-bin stacker.................................................. 3-5

-Operation panel ........................................ 1-13, 7-4

-Peripheral devices............................................ 1-11

-Saddle stitch finisher........................................ 3-14

Password................................................................ 7-8

Peripheral devices....................................... 1-11, 1-12

Photo.................................................................... 4-14

Photoconductive drum .................................. 1-10, 6-2

Placing originals..................................................... 4-3

Plain paper ................................................... 2-3 to 2-4

Portrait.................................................................... 1-2

Postcards ............................................................... 2-8

Power .......................................................... 1-17, 2-23

Power switch ................................................. 1-9, 1-17

Preheat mode......................................................... 1-8

Preset copy ratios................................................. 4-16

[PRINT JOB] key.................................................. 1-16

Print menu................................................ 5-30 to 5-41

-Date ................................................................. 5-33

-Stamp............................................................... 5-34

-Page numbering............................................... 5-35

-Text .................................................................. 5-39

PRINT mode indicators........................................ 1-13

Printer condition ................................................... 2-12

Printer test page................................................... 2-14

[PRIORITY] key.................................................... 1-16

Proper storage ..................................................... 2-16

Protect.................................................................... 7-3

PS3 expansion kit ................................................ 1-12

Punch module ...................................................... 3-15

[PUNCH] key........................................................ 3-18

■ Q

Quick File folder ..................................................... 7-3

[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key ................................... 7-5

[READ-END] key.................................................. 4-12

■ R

Reduction ............................................................. 4-15

Reduction/Enlargement................................. 1-4, 4-15

Replacing the toner cartridges............................. 2-15

Right output tray................................................... 1-11

Rotation copying .................................................... 4-4

■ S

Saddle stitch.........................................1-7, 3-14, 3-17

Saddle stitch finisher................................... 1-11, 3-14

Saddle stitch tray.................................................. 3-14

[SADDLE STITCH] key ........................................ 3-18

Saving a document image file .................... 7-6 to 7-12

-Filing ........................................................7-7 to 7-8

-Print jobs............................................................ 7-9

-Quick file ............................................................ 7-6

-Scan save ............................................7-10 to 7-11

[SCAN TO] key..................................................... 1-16

[SCAN TO HDD] key .............................................. 7-5

[SEARCH] key........................................................ 7-5

Searching for a file ................................... 7-13 to 7-14

Selecting a function.............................................. 1-14

Selecting the exposure level................................. 4-14

Selecting the exposure mode............................... 4-14

Selecting the output tray......................................... 4-9

Sender control...................................................... 2-12

Sender control list ................................................ 2-14

Sending address list............................................. 2-14

Setting the paper size................................... 2-5 to 2-6

Setting the paper type .................................. 2-5 to 2-7

Sharing................................................................... 7-3

Sharp OSA........................................................... 3-25

Side cover latch.................................................... 1-10

Sort..................................................1-3, 3-8, 3-15, 4-9

[SORT] key.................................................... 3-9, 3-18

Special modes (Copier operation).......................... 5-2

Special modes (Document filing function)............ 7-12

Special paper ............................................... 2-3 to 2-4

Special papers ..................................................... 4-20

Specifications ............................................... 8-2 to 8-3

-Duplex module ................................................... 3-2

-Finisher .............................................................. 3-7

-Mail-bin stacker.................................................. 3-5

-Punch module .................................................. 3-15

-Saddle stitch finisher........................................ 3-14

-Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer................... 2-10

-Stand/MPD x 2000 sheet paper drawer........... 2-11

Specifications of paper trays .................................. 2-3

Stamp...................................................1-6, 5-30, 5-34

Stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer 1-9, 1-11, 2-3, 2-10

Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer .1-9, 1-11, 2-3, 2-11

Standard sizes................................................. 1-2, 2-4

Standard sizes in both the inch and AB systems ... 1-2

Staple box .............................................................. 3-7

Staple cartridge........................................... 3-10, 3-14

Staple cartridge replacement ...................... 3-10, 3-19

Staple jam removal..........................3-11, 3-20 to 3-21

Staple sort..............................................1-7, 3-8, 3-16

[STAPLE SORT] key...................................... 3-9, 3-18

Stapler compiler ................................................... 3-14

Stapler section ..................................................... 3-14

Stapling positions ..........................................3-8, 3-16

[START] key.......................................................... 1-13

[STOP/DELETE] key ............................................ 1-16

Storage of supplies............................................... 2-16

System settings........................................... 2-12, 7-24

[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key ............................ 1-13, 7-4

Copy_SEC.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

INDEX

8-8

■ T

Tandem copy............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-9

Text..............................................1-7, 4-14, 5-30, 5-39

Text/photo............................................................. 4-14

The machine does not operate ..................... 2-23, 6-3

Toner cartridge ............................................ 1-10, 2-15

Top cover................................................3-5, 3-7, 3-14

Top tray............................................................ 3-5, 3-7

Total count............................................................ 2-14

Total number of originals ........................................ 4-2

Touch panel...................................1-13, 1-14, 7-4, 7-5

Transparency film .................2-3, 2-4, 2-10, 4-20, 5-23

Transparency inserts..............................1-5, 5-2, 5-23

Tray......................................................................... 1-9

Troubleshooting

-Copier operation ................................................ 6-3

-Document filing function................................... 7-31

-Duplex module................................................... 3-4

-Finisher ............................................................ 3-13

-General information ............................. 2-23 to 2-25

-Saddle stitch finisher........................................ 3-24

Types and sizes of paper ............................. 2-3 to 2-4

Types and sizes of paper that can be used............ 2-3

■ U

Upper exit tray extension............................... 1-9, 1-11

Upper paper output area ........................................ 1-9

User maintenance.................................................. 6-2

User name................................................ 7-24 to 7-26

■ W

Warming up.......................................................... 2-23

■ X

XY Zoom ....................................................... 1-4, 4-18

■ Z

Zoom .................................................................... 4-16

Copy_SEC.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 9 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

Copy_SEC.book 10 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

NOTICE

BE SURE TO ASK YOUR AUTHORIZED SHARP DEALER ABOUT THE WARRANTY THAT YOUR

SELLING DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU. In order to assure you, the end-user, of warranty

protection, Sharp extends a limited warranty to each of its authorized dealers and, in turn, requires

each of its authorized dealers to extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable

than those given to the dealer by Sharp. You should be aware, however, that Sharp does not itself

extend any warranties, either express or implied, directly to you, the end-user and no one is

authorized to make any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp. Specifically, SHARP

DOES NOT EXTEND TO YOU, THE END-USER, ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR

PURPOSE IN CONNECTION WITH THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED

IN, OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PRODUCT. Sharp is not responsible for any

damages or loss, either direct, incidental or consequential, which you, the end-user, may experience

as a result of your purchase or use of the hardware, software or firmware embodied in or used in

conjunction with this Product. Your sole remedy, in the event that you encounter any difficulties with

this Product, is against the authorized dealer from which you purchased the Product. In the event

that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments, please contact the General

Manager, Business Products Group, Sharp Electronics Corporation, Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ

07430-1163, so that Sharp can try to help assure complete satisfaction of all the warranty rights to

which you are entitled from the authorized dealer.

In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments, please contact the

General Manager, Business Products Group, Sharp Electronics Corporation, Sharp Plaza,

Mahwah, NJ 07430-1163, so that Sharp can try to help assure complete satisfaction of all the

warranty rights to which you are entitled from the authorized dealer.

Copy_SEC.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１３日　水曜日　午後３時１分

PRINTED IN CHINA

2007C KS1

TINSE3659FCZ1

SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION

Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1163.

www.sharpusa.com

SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.

335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9

This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink

to help protect the environment.

Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper

MX-M350U/MX-M450U/MX-M350N/MX-M450N

OPERATION MANUAL (for general information and copier operation)

Cover4.fm 1 ページ２００７年３月１４日　水曜日　午前１１時２８分

• PURPOSE OF THE

ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS

• ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS LIST

• USING THE

ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS

• GENERAL SETTINGS

• COPY SETTINGS

• DOCUMENT FILING

SETTINGS

• TO THE ADMINISTRATOR

OF THE MACHINE

Page

ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS

GUIDE

Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain

the maximum benefit from the product.

Before installing this product, be sure to read the installation

requirements and cautions sections of the "Operation manual

(for general information and copier operation)".

Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference

including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general

information and copier operation)" and operation manuals for any

optional equipment which has been installed.

This manual explains settings for use by the administrator of the

machine.

LASER PRINTER

CHINA

KS1

80FCZZ

MX-M350U/MX-M450U/MX-M350N/MX-M450N ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS GUIDE

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 2 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

Contents page

●PURPOSE OF THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS ............................................................................1

●ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST ....................................................................................................3

●USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS.........................................................................................4

●GENERAL SETTINGS .........................................................................................................................7

●COPY SETTINGS...............................................................................................................................16

●DOCUMENT FILING SETTINGS .......................................................................................................18

●TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE ................................................................................22

PURPOSE OF THE ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS

The administrator settings are configured by the administrator of the machine. These settings are used to enable or

disable functions to suit the needs of your workplace.

This manual explains settings related to general use of the machine, settings for the copy function, and settings for

the document filing function*. For administrator settings related to the printer function, fax function, network scanner

function, and Internet fax function, see the following manuals:

●Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation manual (for printer), chapter 6

●Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation manual (for facsimile), chapter 8

●Network scanner / Internet fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation manual (for image send), chapter 8

To access the administrator settings, the administrator password must be entered.

* Can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

General settings

These settings are used to enable number-based auditing mode, adjust power consumption, manage the machine

and peripheral devices, specify the network connection method, and configure security parameters.

Auditing mode can be enabled separately for the copy, printer, fax/Internet fax/network scanner, and document filing*

functions. When auditing mode is enabled for a function, a valid account number must be entered in order to use the

function.

* Can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

When auditing mode is enabled for the printer function, an account number is entered at the user's computer when

the print command is selected. (Depending on the setting of "Cancel jobs of invalid accounts" (page 8), a job may be

printed even if an incorrect account number is entered.)

* The account number is a 5-digit number, and up to 500 accounts can be created.

Copy settings

These settings can be are used to change the factory default copy settings as needed to suit the needs of your

workplace.

When auditing mode is enabled for the copy function,

● A valid account number must be entered to make a copy.

(Copying is not possible unless a valid account number is entered.)

● A count is kept of the number of copies made by each account. This allows you to monitor copier usage by

each account. (The counts can be totaled.)

● A limit can be set for the number of copies that can be made by each account.

The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine

due to product improvements and modifications.

NOTE

An account number must also be entered to print a document that was saved during copying using the document

filing function. (Printing is not possible unless an account number is entered.) The number of pages printed is

added to the copy count.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

PURPOSE OF THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

Document filing settings

These settings can be used to change the factory default settings for the document filing function as needed to suit

the needs of your workplace.

This function can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

When auditing mode is enabled for the document filing function,

● An account number must be entered to print an image that was scan-saved.

(Printing is not possible unless an account number is entered.)

● A count is kept of the number of pages printed by each account, making it possible to monitor each account's

usage of the document filing function (a document filing count is kept).

● A limit can be set for the number of scan-saved image file pages that can be printed.

Setting an administrator password

The administrator password is a 5-digit number that must be entered in order to access the key operator programs.

The administrator of the machine should change the factory default administrator password that was set at the factory

to a new 5-digit number. Be sure to remember the new administrator password, as it must be entered each time the

administrator settings are subsequently used. (Only one administrator password can be set.)

The administrator password is initially set to "00000" at the factory.

To change the administrator password, see "USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS" on page 4.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.fm 2 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後８時２５分

ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST

Settings for general use of the machine, the copy function, and the document filing function are shown in the following list.

The administrator password must be entered in order to use these programs.

● General settings

Setting name Page

Account control

Auditing mode 7

Total pages per account 7

Resetting account 8

Account limit setting 8

Account number control 8

Account number security 8

Cancel jobs of invalid accounts 8

Enter account number in Sharp OSA mode

Job log control

Clear all job log data 9

Energy save

Toner save in printer mode 9

Toner save in copy mode 9

Auto power shut-off 9

Auto power shut-off timer 9

Preheat mode setting 9

Operation settings

Keys touch sound 10

Auto clear setting 10

Disabling of job priority operation 10

Message time setting 10

Disabling of bypass printing 10

Display language setting 10

Key operation setting 10

Disabling switching of display order 11

Disabling of clock adjustment 11

Device control

Original size detector setting 11

Disabling of document feeder 11

Disabling of duplex 11

Disabling of stapler 11

Disabling of punch 11

Disabling of optional paper drawer 11

Disabling of finisher 11

Disabling of mail-bin stacker 11

Disabling of covers/inserts mode 11

Saddle stitch position adjust 12

High speed stacking 12

Auto paper selection setting 12

Optimization of a hard disk 12

Network settings

IPv4 setting 13

IPv6 setting 13

Enable TCP/IP 13

Enable NetWare 13

Enable EtherTalk 13

Enable NetBEUI 13

Reset the NIC 13

Tandem setting 13

PING command 14

Security settings

SSL setting 14

Enable IPsec 14

List print 14

Sharp OSA settings

Default display setting 14

External account setting 14

Change admin password 14

Product key

PS3 expansion kit 15

Network scanner expansion kit 15

Internet fax expansion kit 15

E-mail alert and status 15

Network expansion kit 15

Data security kit 15

Application integration module 15

Application communication module 15

External account module 15

Serial number 15

Initialize and/or store settings

Restore factory defaults 15

Store current configuration 15

Restore configuration 15

● Copy settings

Setting name Page

Copy settings

Initial status settings 16

Exposure adjustment 16

Rotation copy setting 16

Add or change extra preset ratios 16

600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode for document feeder

Quick scan from document glass 16

Initial margin shift setting 17

Erase width adjustment 17

Card shot settings 17

Setting a maximum number of copies 17

Disabling deletion of job programs 17

Disabling of bypass-tray in duplex copy 17

Disabling of auto paper selection 17

● Document filing settings

Setting name Page

Document filing settings

Default mode settings 18

The number of user name displayed setting

Sort method setting 18

Document output options 18

Administrator authority setting 18

Default output tray 18

Delete all quick files 18

Scan complete sound setting 19

Initial resolution setting 19

Default exposure settings 19

Batch print settings 19

Default display setting 19

NOTE

The administrator settings that can be accessed depend on the optional equipment that is installed.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.fm 3 ページ２００７年３月８日　木曜日　午後３時４６分

USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

The procedure for configuring the administrator password is explained below using the "Change admin password" as

an example. Follow the same steps to configure the settings that are described beginning on page 7.

Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

Touch the [ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS]

key.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 5-digit

administrator password.

Each time a number is

entered, the dashes (-)

in the display will change

to asterisks ( ). The

factory default setting for

the key operator code

number is 00000.

Touch the [CHANGE ADMIN PASSWORD]

key .

If you wish to configure a

different administrator

setting, select the

desired setting in this

step.

A screen for the selected

setting will appear.

Configure the setting as explained on pages 7 and

following of this manual.

Use the numeric keys to enter the new

5-digit administrator password.

Use a number for the

administrator password

that has not been set as

an account number for

auditing mode (a

number that has been

set as an account

number cannot be used). The entered number will

be the new administrator password. Be sure to

remember this number.

Touch the [OK] key. You will return to the

screen of step 4.

This completes the

procedure for changing

the administrator

password. If you wish to

configure another

setting, touch the key of

the desired setting in the

screen of step 4.

Touch the [EXIT] key.

You will exit the

administrator settings.

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM

SETTINGS

ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

SENDER CONTROL

FAX DATA

RECEIVE/FORWARD

ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD

CHANGE ADMIN

PASSWORD

NGS

PRINTER

SETTINGS

00000

-----

OPERATION

SETTINGS

EXIT

PRINTER

1/2

JupiterII_Admin_sec.fm 4 ページ２００６年１２月１９日　火曜日　午後８時２６分

USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

Additional information on using the keys to configure administrator settings

A When a key that appears in the form is touched, the setting screen of that key will appear.

B When a checkbox ( ) appears in front of a setting, a checkmark ( ) will appear when the checkbox is touched.

This indicates that the setting is enabled. If a checkbox with a checkmark ( ) is touched, the checkmark is

cleared ( ) and the setting is disabled.

C If the settings continue on the following screen(s), touch the and keys to move back and forth through the

screens. To return to the category selection screen, touch the [OK] key.

D The currently set numerical value is displayed.

E Numerical values can be set by touching the and keys.

(1 999)

DISABLING OF DOCUMENT

FEEDER

DISABLING OF PUNCH

DISABLING OF LARGE

CAPACITY CASSETTE

DISABLING OF DUPLEX

DISABLING OF STAPLER

ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTOR SETTING

DEVICE CONTROL

SYSTEM SETTINGS

1/2

These keys and indicator are available

on setting screens that require the entry

of numerical values.

XXX

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 5 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

USING THE ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS

Administrator settings menu

The administrator settings are arranged in the following menu.

Refer to this menu when enabling or disabling the settings that are explained beginning on the following page.

* Some items contain an additional level of settings.

For the following settings, see the indicated manuals.

Printer settings Operation manual (for printer)

Fax / Image send settings Operation manual (for facsimile) and

Operation manual (for image send)

TONER SAVE IN PRINTER MODE

TONER SAVE IN COPY MODE

AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF

KEYS TOUCH SOUND

AUTO CLEAR SETTING

DISABLING OF JOB PRIORITY OPERATION

MESSAGE TIME SETTING

DISABLING OF BYPASS PRINTING

ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTOR SETTING

DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER

DISABLING OF DUPLEX

DISABLING OF STAPLER

DISABLING OF PUNCH

DISABLING OF OPTIONAL PAPER DRAWER

DISABLING OF FINISHER

ACCOUNT CONTROL

OPERATION SETTINGS

DEVICE CONTROL

CHANGE ADMIN PASSWORD

ENERGY SAVE

COPY SETTINGS

LIST PRINT

AUDITING MODE

TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT

RESETTING ACCOUNT

ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING

CLEAR ALL JOB LOG DATA

ACCOUNT NUMBER CONTROL

ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY

CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS

ENTER ACCOUNT NUMBER IN Sharp OSA MODE

DISPLAY LANGUAGE SETTING

KEY OPERATION SETTING

DISABLING SWITCHING OF DISPLAY ORDER

DISABLING OF CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

PRODUCT KEY

JOB LOG CONTROL

Level 2Level 1

SECURITY SETTING

IPv4 SETTING

IPv6 SETTING

ENABLE TCP/IP

ENABLE NetWare

ENABLE EtherTalk

NETWORK SETTINGS

ENABLE NetBEUI

RESET THE NIC

TANDEM SETTING

PING COMMAND

DISABLING OF MAIL-BIN STACKER

DISABLING OF COVERS/INSERTS MODE

SADDLE STITCH POSITION ADJUST

HIGH SPEED STACKING

AUTO PAPER SELECTION SETTING

OPTIMIZATION OF A HARD DISK

INITIAL STATUS SETTINGS

EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT

ROTATION COPY SETTING

ADD OR CHANGE EXTRA PRESET RATIOS

600dpi x 600dpi SCANNING MODE FOR DOCUMENT FEEDER

QUICK SCAN FROM DOCUMENT GLASS

INITIAL MARGIN SHIFT SETTING

ERASE WIDTH ADJUSTMENT

CARD SHOT SETTINGS

SETTING A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF COPIES

DISABLING DELETION OF JOB PROGRAMS

DISABLING OF BYPASS-TRAY IN DUPLEX COPY

DISABLING OF AUTO PAPER SELECTION

AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER

PREHEAT MODE SETTING

RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS

STORE CURRENT CONFIGURATION

INITIALIZE AND/OR STORE SETTINGS

RESTORE CONFIGURATION

DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTING

Sharp OSA SETTINGS

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT SETTING

DEFAULT MODE SETTINGS

THE NUMBER OF USER NAME DISPLAYED SETTING

SORT METHOD SETTING

DOCUMENT OUTPUT OPTIONS

ADMINISTRATOR AUTHORITY SETTING

DEFAULT OUTPUT TRAY

DOCUMENT FILING SETTINGS

DELETE ALL QUICK FILES

SCAN COMPLETE SOUND SETTING

INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING

DEFAULT EXPOSURE SETTINGS

BATCH PRINT SETTINGS

DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTING

Enter admin password

PS3 EXPANSION KIT

NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT

INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT

E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS

NETWORK EXPANSION KIT

DATA SECURITY KIT

APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE

APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE

EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE

SERIAL NUMBER

SSL SETTING

ENABLE IPsec

JupiterII_Admin_sec.fm 6 ページ２００７年３月８日　木曜日　午後３時４７分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Administrator settings for general use of the machine are explained in this section.

Account control

"Account control" consists of the following settings.

● Auditing mode

● Total pages per account

● Resetting account

● Account limit setting

● Account number control

● Account number security

● Cancel jobs of invalid accounts

● Enter account number in Sharp OSA mode

Auditing mode

When AUDITING MODE is enabled, a count is kept of

the pages printed by each account (up to 500 accounts

can be established). The page counts can be viewed in

the display. To use the machine, a valid 5-digit account

number must be entered.

This function is initially disabled.

Touch the [AUDITING MODE] key to display the

following screen.

● Auditing mode is enabled for functions that have

checkmarks in the checkboxes. If you need to

disable auditing mode for a function, touch its

checkbox to remove the checkmark.

Total pages per account

This

setting

is used to display or print the total number

of pages printed by each account. Misfed paper is not

counted.

When using the network scanner feature and fax

feature, the number of transmitted pages can also be

displayed or printed. (Touch the [IMAGE SEND] key to

change screens.)

Touch the [TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT] key to

display the following screen.

● Printing out all accounts

Touch the [PRINT] key to print out the total pages of

all accounts. If the [CANCEL] key appears, this key

can be touched to cancel printing.

● Displaying only selected accounts

If the account that you wish to view does not appear

in the screen, touch the key or key until it

appears.

NOTE

Some items in the programs may not be available

depending on your machine and what options are

installed.

NOTE

To enable Auditing mode, program an account

number as explained in "Account number control" on

page 8.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

AUDITING MODE

DOCUMENT FILING

COPIES PRINTS

IMAGE SEND

SYSTEM SETTINGS

PAPER OUTPUT

TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT

ACCOUNT

NUMBER

COPIES PRINTS

1/1

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT

FILING

00001

MAXIMUM

00002

MAXIMUM

00003

MAXIMUM

00,005,678

20,000,000

00,045,678

20,000,000

00,000,678

20,000,000

00,045,678

40,000,000

00,045,678

40,000,000

00,005,678

40,000,000

00,000,678

--,---,---

00,000,678

--,---,---

00,000,678

--,---,---

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 7 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Resetting account

This setting is used to reset the printed page count and

transmitted page count of an account to "0".

Touch the [RESETTING ACCOUNT] key to display the

following screen.

● Resetting one account at a time

Touch the key of the account that you wish to reset,

and then select [YES] in the confirmation screen that

appears. If the account that you want to reset is not

displayed, touch the or key to scroll through

the screens until the desired account appears.

When finished, touch the [OK] key.

● Resetting all accounts

Touch the [RESET] key and then select [YES] in the

confirmation screen that appears.

When finished, touch the [OK] key.

Account limit setting

A limit for the number of copies that can be made can

be set for a single account or for all accounts at once.

The maximum limit that can be entered is 99,999,999.

Touch the [ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING] key to display

the following setting screen.

● Limiting the number of copies per account

Enter the number of the desired account with the

numeric keys, and then enter limits for the copy,

printer, and document filing functions. After entering

each limit, touch the [ENTER] key. When finished,

touch the [IMAGE SEND] key and then enter limits

for fax send, scanner and Internet fax send.

If you enter the number of an account that already

has a limit set, the limit will appear in the limit display.

Press the [C] key to change the limit to a hyphen (-),

and then enter a new limit.

When finished, touch the [OK] key to exit.

● Limiting the number of copies of all accounts

Touch the [ALL ACCOUNTS] key. [ALL] appears in

the account number entry screen.

The limits for all accounts are entered in the same

way as the limits for the individual accounts.

When finished, touch the [OK] key to exit.

Account number control

This setting is used to set, delete, and change account

numbers used for copy and other modes, as well as

print a list of the account numbers that have been set.

Up to 500 account numbers can be set.

● Each account number has 5-digit. When you have

finished setting one account number, you can

continue setting other account numbers.

● Two methods are available for deleting account

numbers: deleting an individual account number,

and deleting all account numbers at once.

● To change an account number, enter the account

number to be changed and then enter a new account

number. After an account number is changed,

another account number can be selected to be

changed. Changes for unregistered account

numbers will not be registered.

Account number security

This setting is used to prevent attempts to guess an

account number. When enabled, a warning message

will appear and account number entry will be prohibited

for one minute if an incorrect account number is

entered three times in a row.

Cancel jobs of invalid accounts

When this setting is enabled and auditing mode is

enabled for the printer function, a print job will not be

printed if an incorrect account number is entered or if

an account number is not entered. If this setting is

disabled, printing will take place and the number of

pages printed will be included in the "OTHERS" count.

Enter account number in Sharp OSA mode

When this checkbox is selected, the account number

entry screen will appear to allow account number entry

each time a user switches to Sharp OSA mode.

To use auditing mode, enable it.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

PAPER OUTPUT

RESETTING ACCOUNT

ACCOUNT

NUMBER

00001

00002

00003

00,005,678

00,045,678

00,000,678

00,045,678

00,005,678

00,000,678

00,000,078

COPIES PRINTS

1/1

RESET

ALL ACCOUNTS

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT

FILING

SYSTEM SETTINGS

PAPER OUTPUT

ACCOUNT LIMIT SETTING

INPUT ACCOUNT NUMBER.

ACCOUNT

NUMBER

TOTAL

-----

MAXIMUM --,---,--- --,---,--- --,---,---

ALL ACCOUNTS ENTER

COPIES PRINTS

IMAGE SEND

DOCUMENT

FILING

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 8 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Job log control

Clear all job log data

The machine keeps a log of the jobs it has run. The job

log can be used to check general use of the machine.

The job log can be written to your computer in CSV

format using a Web browser. This setting is used to

clear the job log. There is normally no need to use the

program.

Energy save

"Energy save" provides the following settings to reduce

your power costs. From an environmental perspective,

this also helps conserve natural resources and reduce

pollution.

● Toner save in printer mode

● Toner save in copy mode

● Auto power shut-off

● Auto power shut-off timer

● Preheat mode setting

Toner save in printer mode

Printing in the toner save mode will reduce toner

consumption. If toner save is set, black solid areas will

be printed as halftone. (This setting is effective only for

printing without use of the dedicated printer driver. If

the printer driver is used, the printer driver setting will

override this setting.)

Toner save in copy mode

This setting is used to save toner in copy mode. This

setting functions the same way as toner save in printer

mode.

Auto power shut-off

If the machine is not used for a set duration of time,

auto power shut-off activates to enable maximum

conservation of energy.

This function allows you to reduce power costs, and at

the same time helps conserve natural resources and

reduce pollution.

This setting is used to enable or disable auto power

shut-off. To disable the function, remove the checkmark

from the checkbox. Use this setting if you prefer that

auto power shut-off does not operate.

Auto power shut-off timer

This setting is used to configure the time after which

auto power shut-off activates.

The time can be set to as long as 240 minutes in

increments of one minute.

Preheat mode setting

If the printer is not used for the duration of time

configured in this setting after printing is finished, it will

enter preheat mode. This function reduces your power

costs, and at the same time helps conserve natural

resources and reduce pollution.

Select the most suitable setting to match your pattern

of use of the printer.

The time can be set to as long as 240 minutes in

increments of one minute. (Preheat mode cannot be

disabled.)

Print data Example of

print in the

toner save

mode

NOTE

If you prefer that auto power shut-off activates as

little as possible, it is recommended that you try

lengthening the time setting after which activation

takes place rather than disabling the function

altogether. (The time setting is changed using the

following "AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER"

setting.)

NOTE

● We suggest you set the most appropriate time

according to your usage pattern.

● This time setting is not effective when auto power

shut-off mode is disabled using the "Auto power

shut-off" setting.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 9 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Operation settings

The "Operation settings" are related to basic operation

of the machine and consist of the following settings:

● Keys touch sound

● Auto clear setting

● Disabling of job priority operation

● Message time setting

● Disabling of bypass printing

● Display language setting

● Key operation setting

● Disabling switching of display order

● Disabling of clock adjustment

Keys touch sound

This setting is used to adjust (or turn off) the volume of

the beep that sounds when you touch a key. You can

also have three beeps sound at base values when

setting the ratio in copy mode or adjusting the exposure

in any mode.

To change the volume, touch the desired volume key.

When "KEY TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT" is

selected, three beeps will sound at the base setting

values indicated below.

Auto clear setting

If the machine is not used for a certain duration of time,

the auto clear function will clear any settings that have

been selected and return the screen to the main screen

of copy mode or the job status screen. This setting is

used to set the duration of time after which auto clear

operates. The time can be set from 10 seconds to 240

seconds in increments of 10 seconds, or the auto clear

function can be disabled. (Note that auto clear can only

be disabled for copy mode.)

Disabling of job priority operation

This setting is used to prohibit use of the [PRIORITY]

key in the job status screen.

Message time setting

This setting is used to set the length of time that

messages appear in the display. (This applies to

messages that appear for a certain length of time and

then automatically disappear.)

The time can be set to as long as 12 seconds in

increments of one second.

Disabling of bypass printing

When a job cannot be printed because there is no

suitable paper and there is a subsequent job that can

be printed, the subsequent job will be printed ahead of

the job that cannot be printed

(page 1-15 of the

"Operation manual (general information and copier

operation)"). This setting can be used to disable

printing of subsequent jobs in this situation.

*1 Except when paper runs out in the middle of a job

Display language setting

This setting is used to select the display language.

Key operation setting

These settings are used to set the length of time a key

in the touch panel must be touched before the key input

is registered, and to prevent repeated key input when a

key is touched continuously.

• Time until key input is registered

The time can be set from 0 seconds to 2 seconds in

increments of 0.5 seconds. Normally the time is set

to 0 seconds so that key input is immediately

registered when a key is touched. By lengthening the

time setting, key input can be prevented when a key

is touched accidentally. Keep in mind, however, that

when a longer setting is selected more care is

required when touching keys to ensure that key input

is registered.

• Prohibit key repeat

The touch panel contains keys such as the zoom

keys (for setting the ratio) that can be touched

continuously to make a value change until it reaches

a desired value.

This feature whereby a value changes continuously

while a key is touched is called key repeat.

Key repeat is normally enabled. If you wish to prohibit

key repeat, select the [DISABLE AUTO KEY

REPEAT] checkbox.

Screen in which setting is

effective

Base value

Ratio setting screen in main

screen of copy mode

Ratio = 100%

Exposure adjustment screen in

main screen of copy mode

Exposure level3

(middle level)

Exposure adjustment screen in

main screen of fax, Internet fax,

and network scanner modes

Exposure adjustment screen in

[SCAN TO HDD] in main

screen of document filing mode

SYSTEM SETTINGS

KEYS TOUCH SOUND

KEY TOUCH SOUND AT INITIAL POINT

KEYS TOUCH SOUND

Off

Volume: HighVolume: Low

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 10 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Disabling switching of display order

This setting is used to disable the function that changes

the key display order each time a selected tab is

touched on a screen that is divided into tabs, including

the screens for selecting the user name and folder for

the "SCAN TO HDD" and "FILE" functions, and the

address book screen of image send mode.

This does not affect the function that changes the order

of display of files in document filing folders.

Disabling of clock adjustment

This setting is used to prohibit changes to the clock

adjust setting. When this setting is enabled, "Clock" in

the system settings cannot be used. To adjust the date

and time, this setting must first be disabled (remove the

checkmark).

Device control

Use these settings when a peripheral device on the

machine has failed or when you wish to temporarily

disable a device. These settings can also be used to

change certain device function settings as needed to

suit the needs of your workplace.

"Device control" consists of the following settings:

● Original size detector setting

● Disabling of document feeder

● Disabling of duplex

● Disabling of stapler

● Disabling of punch

● Disabling of optional paper drawer

● Disabling of finisher

● Disabling of mail-bin stacker

● Disabling of covers/inserts mode

● Saddle stitch position adjust

● High speed stacking

● Auto paper selection setting

● Optimization of a hard disk

Original size detector setting

This setting is used to select the standard original sizes

that are detected by the original size detection function.

Select one of the four groups indicated below. The

factory default setting is "INCH-1 (AB-1)". Original size

detection by the document glass can also be disabled.

If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is

set, originals will be regarded as EXTRA for all copier

functions and no original size will be displayed.

Disabling of document feeder

This setting is used to prevent use of the automatic

document feeder when it malfunctions. In this case,

scanning can still be performed using the document

glass.

Disabling of duplex

This setting is used to disable duplex printing when the

duplex module malfunctions. When this settings is

enabled, only one-sided printing can be performed.

Disabling of stapler

This setting is used to disable stapling when the stapler

unit of the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher

malfunctions.

Disabling of punch

Use this setting when you wish to prohibit punching or

when the punch unit of the finisher or saddle stitch

finisher has failed.

Disabling of optional paper drawer

This setting is used to disable use of the stand/3 x 500

sheet paper drawer or stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper

drawer when it malfunctions.

Disabling of finisher

Use this setting when you wish to prohibit use of the

finisher or saddle stitch finisher, or when either has

failed.

Disabling of mail-bin stacker

This setting is used to disable use of the mail-bin

stacker when it malfunctions.

Disabling of covers/inserts mode

Use this setting to prohibit the use of covers/inserts

mode.

Group

Detectable original sizes

Document feeder tray (for automatic

document feeder)

Document glass

INCH-1

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",

8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R,

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

A3, A4

INCH-2

11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13",

8-1/2" x 11",

8-1/2" x 11"R,

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

A3, A4

3 AB-1

A3, A4, A4R, A5,

B4, B5, B5R

11" x 17", 8-1/2"

x 11",

216x330

4 AB-2

A3, A4, A4R, A5,

B5, B5R, 216x330

11" x 17", 8-1/2"

x 11", B4

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 11 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Saddle stitch position adjust

This setting is used to adjust the stapling position

(folding position) when using the saddle stitch function

of the optional saddle stitch finisher.

The value can be adjusted in 0.1 mm increments within

±3.0 mm from the reference position for each paper

size.

[AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH] checkmark

The saddle stitch print function can normally be divided

into the following three general steps.

1. The pages of the original are automatically

reordered to allow saddle stitch binding (saddle

stitch function).

2. The pages are folded at the center.

3. The paper is stapled at the center in two places

(saddle stitch stapling).

The [AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH] checkbox is

selected by default.

Selection of the checkbox assumes the use of the

above saddle stitch printing function (three steps).

Saddle stitch stapling exceptions

Depending on the purpose of saddle stitch stapling, it

may be necessary to perform saddle stitch stapling on

printed matter that has already been bound by saddle

stitching. In this case, it is necessary to disable step 1

above. If you frequently perform this type of exceptional

saddle stitch stapling that requires disabling step 1,

remove the checkmark from the [AUTOMATIC

SADDLE STITCH] checkbox.

High speed stacking

This setting is used to give priority to print speed when

printing in offset mode with the saddle stitch finisher

installed.

When priority is given to print speed, a slight decrease

in stacking performance may occur. This setting is

enabled by factory default.

Auto paper selection setting

Use this setting to select the paper type* for which the

automatic paper selection function operates.

Selections are "PLAIN PAPER", "PLAIN AND

RECYCLE PAPER", and "RECYCLE PAPER".

* The paper type set for each paper tray in the paper

tray settings of the system settings (page 2-5 of the

"Operation manual (for general information and

copier operation)").

Optimization of a hard disk

This is used to optimize the "Main folder" and "Custom

folder" that are used for the document filing function.

When this setting is executed, a message will appear

asking if it is okay to stop the job in progress. Touch the

[YES] key to stop the job and begin optimization. When

optimization ends, the machine will restart if the power

switch is switched on, or turn off if the power switch is

switched off.

Min.-3mmMax.+3mm

Reference position

Position adjusted

to the minus

direction

Position adjusted

to the plus

direction

CAUTION

If the power switch is switched off or the power plug

is unplugged while optimization is in progress, the

hard drive may be damaged and stored data or

received data may be lost.

NOTES

● About stopped jobs

Printing of received faxes and Internet-Faxes and

transmission of stored fax jobs will automatically

resume after the machine restarts.

For jobs other than the above (copy jobs, print

jobs, document filing print jobs, etc.), the job

information is not retained and thus the stopped

job must be executed again manually (for

example, the original for a copy job must be

placed again and the copy operation repeated).

● Operation after optimization starts

Until optimization finishes (or the [CANCEL] key is

touched to cancel optimization),

• The operation panel cannot be used, with the

exception of the [CANCEL] key.

• Operation from the Web page is not possible.

• Faxes and Internet-Faxes cannot be received.

• Print jobs will not be accepted.

• The power will not turn off even if the power

switch is switched off.

• Auto power shut-off mode will not activate even

if the set time elapses. (Preheat mode will

activate.)

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 12 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Network settings

These settings are set when this product is used as a

network printer.

After you complete the setting for one setting, you must

exit the administrator settings, turn off the main switch,

wait briefly, and then turn on the main switch again

before any other settings can be set. The setting that

was set will be effective after the power is turned on.

The following items can be configured in the "Network

settings".

● IPv4 setting

● IPv6 setting

● Enable TCP/IP

● Enable NetWare

● Enable EtherTalk

● Enable NetBEUI

● Reset the NIC

● Tandem setting

● PING command

IPv4 setting

When using this product in a network that uses the

TCP/IP protocol (IPv4), use this setting to set the IP

address (IP address, IP subnet mask, and IP gateway)

of this product. The setting is set to ENABLE DHCP by

factory default setting, which obtains the IP address

setting automatically. When using this product on a

TCP/IP network, be sure to turn on the "Enable

TCP/IP" setting below.

IPv6 setting

When using this product in a network that uses the

TCP/IP protocol (IPv6), use this setting to set the IP

address (enable IPv6, DHCPv6, IP address, prefix

length, and default gateway) of this product. By factory

default, the IPv6 setting is disabled. When using this

product on a TCP/IP network, be sure to turn on the

"Enable TCP/IP" setting below.

In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD or

IPP protocol.

Enable TCP/IP

When using this product in a network that uses the

TCP/IP protocol, set this setting. Also set the IP

address using the setting "IP address setting" above.

Default setting: Enable

Enable NetWare

When using this product in a network that uses the

NetWare protocol, set this setting.

Default setting: Enable

Enable EtherTalk

When using this product in a network that uses the

EtherTalk protocol, set this setting.

Default setting: Enable

Enable NetBEUI

When using this product in a network that uses the

EtherTalk protocol, set this setting.

Default setting: Enable

Reset the NIC

This setting is used to reset all setting items of NIC

(Network Interface Card) of this product to the factory

default settings.

Tandem setting

This setting is used to configure the IP address and

port number of the client printer when you wish to have

two machines (which are used as TCP/IP network

printers) print in tandem.

The factory default setting for the port number is

[50001]. Unless you experience difficulty with this

setting, it does not need to be changed.

The tandem function can also be prohibited, or the

reception of tandem data from the other machine can

be prohibited. (Normally this is not necessary.)

To prohibit the tandem function, select "DISABLING

OF MASTER MACHINE MODE".

To prohibit reception of tandem data from the other

machine, select "DISABLING OF SLAVE MACHINE

MODE".

NOTE

For setting and modification of "Network settings",

be sure to consult with the network administrator.

If DHCP is used, the IP address assigned to the

machine may be changed automatically on occasion.

If this happens, printing will not be possible.

If DHCP is used, the IP address assigned to the

machine may be changed automatically on occasion.

If this happens, printing will not be possible.

NOTE

If any of the [NETWORK SETTINGS] were changed

prior to execution of this setting, you must turn off the

power switch after exiting the administrator setting,

wait briefly, and then turn on the power switch to

make the factory default settings take effect.

NOTE

To use the tandem function when auditing mode is

enabled, the same account number must be entered

on both machines. If the same account number is not

entered, only the server machine may print or the

printed pages may not be added to the correct

account.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 13 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

GENERAL SETTINGS

PING command

This setting is used to check if the machine and a

computer connected to the network can communicate.

Enter the IP address of the computer that you wish to

check and touch the [START] key. A message will

appear indicating whether or not there was a response

from the computer.

Security settings

The following settings are related to security. Touch the

[SECURITY SETTINGS] key to configure the settings.

When any of these settings are changed, you must exit

the administrator settings, turn off the main switch, wait

a brief interval, and then turn the main switch back on

to make the new settings take effect.

SSL setting

SSL can be used for data transmission over a network.

SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of

information communicated over a network. Encrypting

data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive

information safely.

Server port

● HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP

communication.

● IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP

communication.

Client port

● FTPS: Apply SSL encryption to FTP

communication.

● SMTP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to SMTP

communication.

● POP3-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to POP3

communication.

Level of encryption

The encryption strength can be set to one of 3 levels.

Enable IPsec

IPsec can be used for data transmission/reception on a

network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent and

received safely without the need to configure settings

for IP packet encryption in a Web browser or other

higher-level application.

This setting is only used to enable or disable IPsec;

detailed IPsec settings are configured in the Web pages.

Some Web page settings may not allow connection to

the machine, or the settings may not allow printing,

scanning, or Web page display. In this case, deselect

[ENABLE IPsec] in this screen and change the Web

page settings.

List print

This setting is used to print lists and reports that can

only be printed from the administrator settings.

• Touch the [ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST] key

to print one of the following groups:

Copy, printer, fax/image send, document filing,

general, security, all administrator settings lists

• Touch a key other than the [ADMINISTRATOR

SETTINGS LIST] key to begin printing a list or report.

Sharp OSA settings

The following settings are related to Sharp OSA. Touch

the [Sharp OSA SETTINGS] key to configure the

settings.

● Default display setting

● External account setting

Default display setting

The default screen that appears when the

[DOCUMENT FILING] key is pressed can be specified.

Select either the base screen of document filing mode

or the external application selection screen. This

setting can only be configured when the application

communication module is installed. The setting also

appears in the document filing settings.

When the [CA] key ([Clear all] key) is pressed in

document filing mode or Sharp OSA mode, the initial

screen of the mode appears, regardless of the default

display setting.

External account setting

When [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT CONTROL]

is enabled, the machine enters external count mode.

When both [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT

CONTROL] and [ENABLE AUTHENTICATION BY

EXTERNAL SERVER] are enabled, the machine

enters external authentication mode. This item can

only be selected when the external account module is

installed.

Change admin password

This setting is used to change the administrator

password that must be entered to configure the

administrator settings. When the machine is first used,

the administrator should change the administrator

password that was set at the factory to the desired

5-digit code. Only one administrator password can be

set.

The factory default setting for the administrator

password is 00000.

SYSTEM SETTINGS

SECURITY SETTINGS

SSL SETTINGS

ENABLE IPsec

JupiterIIAdminsec.fm14ページ２００７年４月１０日火曜日午前９時５１分

GENERAL SETTINGS

Product key

Use these settings to enter the product keys for the

following options.

PS3 expansion kit

This setting is used to enter the product key for the PS3

expansion kit (this allows the machine to be used as a

PostScript compatible printer).

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Network scanner expansion kit

This setting is used to enter the product key for the

network scanner expansion kit.

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Internet fax expansion kit

This setting is used to enter the product key for the

Internet fax expansion kit.

Ask your dealer for the product key.

E-mail alert and status

This setting is used to enter the product key for E-MAIL

ALERT AND STATUS, which enables customer

product support via a network system.

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Network expansion kit

This setting is used to enter the product key that allows

the machine to be used on a network.

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Data security kit

This setting is used to enter the product key for the data

security kit.

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Application integration module

This setting is used to enter the product key that allows

use of the metadata send function.

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Application communication module

This setting is used to enter the product key that allows

the machine to be linked to a "standard application".

Ask your dealer for the product key.

External account module

This setting is used to enter the product key that allows

the machine to be linked to an "external account

application".

Ask your dealer for the product key.

Serial number

This setting is used to check the serial number of the

machine.

Initialize and/or store settings

These settings are used to return the administrator

settings to the factory default settings, to store the

current settings, and to restore stored administrator

settings. (Note that this also includes printer

configuration settings.)

The following settings are available:

● Restore factory defaults

● Store current configuration

● Restore configuration

Restore factory defaults

This setting is used to return the administrator settings

(including the printer configuration settings) to the

factory default settings. If you need a record of the

settings prior to restoration of the default settings, use

"List print" (page 14) to print a list of the settings.

Store current configuration

This setting is used to store the current administrator

settings in memory. The stored settings will remain in

memory even if the power switch is turned off. To retrieve

the stored settings, use the following

Restore

configuration

setting.

Restore configuration

This setting is used to retrieve the configuration that was

stored using the

Store current configuration

setting and

restore it as the current configuration.

The currently set configuration will change to the

configuration read from memory.

NOTE

To make the default settings take effect after

executing this setting, exit the administrator settings,

turn off the power switch, wait at least 3 seconds,

and then turn on the power switch again.

NOTE

A confirmation message will appear at the end of the

procedure executing settings marked by *1. If you

need to cancel execution of the setting, touch the

[NO] key.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.fm 15 ページ２００７年３月８日　木曜日　午後３時４７分

COPY SETTINGS

This section explains the administrator settings that are used for copy mode.

Copy settings

"Copy settings" consists of the following settings:

● Initial status settings

● Exposure adjustment

● Rotation copy setting

● Add or change extra preset ratios

● 600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode for document

feeder

● Quick scan from document glass

● Initial margin shift setting

● Erase width adjustment

● Card shot settings

● Setting a maximum number of copies

● Disabling deletion of job programs

●

Disabling of bypass-tray in duplex copy

● Disabling of auto paper selection

*1 Default settings selected with these settings apply

to all functions of the machine (not just the copy

function).

Initial status settings

The copy settings revert to the default settings when

the power switch is turned on, when the [CA] key is

pressed, or when the auto clear time elapses. This

setting is used to change the default settings, or return

changed default settings to the initial factory default

settings.

Defaults for the following copy settings can be

changed:

Paper tray/Exposure tray/Copy ratio/2-sided copy/Out

put (auto, sort, staple sort, group, output tray)

Exposure adjustment

This setting is used to adjust the exposure level when

"Auto" is used for the copy exposure.

The factory setting is "5". "1" indicates lighter density

and "9" indicates darker density on the touch panel.

Rotation copy setting

This setting is used to have the image of an original

automatically rotated when the orientation of the

original does not match the orientation of the copy

paper.

(Rotation copy will function only if the auto paper select

or auto image mode has been selected.)

Add or change extra preset ratios

When using inch sizes, there are normally four preset

enlargement ratios and four preset reduction ratios.

When using AB sizes, there are normally five preset

enlargement ratios and five preset reduction ratios.

This

setting

allows you to add two more preset

enlargement ratios and two more preset reduction ratios.

This

setting

also allows you to change a preset ratio.

600dpi x 600dpi scanning mode for document

feeder

Use this setting to change the original scanning

resolution of the automatic document feeder from 600

x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi.

If this mode is set, the copy quality for fine characters

and fine lines will be improved but the original scanning

speed will be slower.

Quick scan from document glass

Use this setting to change the original scanning

resolution on the document glass from 600 x 600dpi to

600 x 300 dpi.

When this setting is enabled, the first copy time will be

shorter, however, copy images will be slightly coarser.

NOTE

If this setting is used to change the default setting for

the duplex function to other than "one-sided"

"one-sided" and the automatic document feeder fails

or is disabled*, the setting will revert to "one-sided"

"one-sided".

* DISABLING OF DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 11)

DISABLING OF DUPLEX (page 11)

NOTE

To copy an 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" or A5 size original onto

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R or A5R paper, this setting must be

enabled.

NOTE

Only an added preset ratio can be changed.

NOTE

If you prefer a quicker scanning speed over higher

resolution, do not enable this setting.

NOTE

If you prefer a higher quality copy image over a

shorter first copy time, do not enable this setting.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 16 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

COPY SETTINGS

Initial margin shift setting

This setting is used to set the initial margin shift

amount.

The initial margin shift amount can be set from 0" to 1"

(0 mm to 20 mm) in increments of 1/8" (1 mm).

Normally the margin shift is set to 1/2" (10 mm) for both

the front and back of the paper.

Erase width adjustment

This setting is used to set the initial width of edge erase

copying.

The edge erase width can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to

20 mm) in increments of 1/8" (1 mm).

The edge erase and center erase widths are normally

set to 1/2" (10 mm).

Card shot settings

This setting is used to set the initial original size for the

card shot function.

Enter the X dimension (width) first and then the Y

dimension (length).

Both the X and Y dimensions can be set from 1" to

8-1/2" (25 mm to 210 mm) in increments of 1/8" (1 mm).

Setting a maximum number of copies

This setting is used to set the maximum number of

copies that are allowed per original.

Any number from 1 to 999 can be set for the maximum.

The maximum number of copies is initially set to 999.

Disabling deletion of job programs

This setting is used to prohibit the deletion and

changing of copy settings stored in job programs.

Disabling of bypass-tray in duplex copy

This setting is used to disable the use of the bypass

tray when making duplex copies.

The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets,

transparency film, and other special papers for which

two-sided copying is prohibited. If one of these special

papers enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or damage

to the unit may result. If special media for which

two-sided copying is prohibited is often used, it is

recommended that you enable this setting.

Disabling of auto paper selection

This setting is used to disable the auto paper selection

function.

When this setting is enabled, paper that is the same

size as the original placed on the document glass or in

the automatic document feeder is not automatically

selected.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 17 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

DOCUMENT FILING SETTINGS

This section explains administrator settings for the document filing function.

This function can only be used on the MX-M350N/MX-M450N, or when the document filing function has been added.

Document filing settings

"Document filing settings" consists of the following

settings:

● Default mode settings

● The number of user name displayed setting

● Sort method setting

● Document output options

● Administrator authority setting

● Default output tray

● Delete all quick files

● Scan complete sound setting

● Initial resolution setting

● Default exposure settings

● Batch print settings

● Default display setting

Default mode settings

This setting is used to select the initial state of the

confidential checkbox (selected or not selected) in the

detailed settings screen of the document filing function.

Touch the [CONFIDENTIAL MODE] in this setting if

you want the confidential checkbox to be initially

selected. Touch the [SHARING MODE] key if you do

not want the confidential checkbox to not be initially

selected. Normally the check box is not initially

selected.

The number of user name displayed setting

The number of user names displayed in one screen of

the user name list can be changed from 8 (this is the

normal setting) to 6 or 12.

Touch [6], [8], or [12] to select the number.

Sort method setting

This setting is used to select how lists of files stored in

the "MAIN FOLDER", "CUSTOM FOLDER", and

"QUICK FILE FOLDER" are ordered. Select ordering

by [FILE NAME], [USER NAME], or [DATE].

Document output options

This setting is used to select the operations (print and

send) that are allowed for stored files.

• The [PRINT] key in the [DOCUMENT OUTPUT

SETTINGS] screen controls printing from the [JOB

SETTINGS] screen.

For example, if the [PRINT] key in this setting is

touched and only the [COPY] and [FAX SEND

(INCL.PC-FAX)] checkboxes are selected in the

screen that subsequently appears, it will only be

possible to print stored files of copy jobs and fax jobs

from the [JOB SETTINGS] screen of document filing.

Files saved in modes that are not selected cannot be

printed from the [JOB SETTINGS] screen.

• Similarly, the [SCAN SEND], [FAX SEND], and

[I-FAX SEND] keys control the corresponding

transmission operations in the [JOB SETTINGS]

transmission screen.

Administrator authority setting

When a password has been established for a file, user

name or folder, this setting is used to allow the

administrator password to be entered instead of the

password in order to delete the item. This is only for

deletion; editing is not possible.

Default output tray

This setting is used when a finisher is installed to select

the output tray for printing of stored files.

Delete all quick files

This setting is used to delete all files except protected

files from the Quick File Folder.

File deletion begins when you touch the [DELETE] key

and then touch the [YES] key in the message that

appears.

To have all files (except protected files) automatically

deleted from the Quick File Folder each time the power

is turned on, select the [DELETE QUICK FILES AT

POWER UP. (PROTECTED FILES EXCLUDED)]

checkbox.

NOTE

When 6 or 8 names per screen is selected, each

displayed key name can be up to 18 characters long.

When 12 names per screen is selected, each key

name can only be up to 10 characters long.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 18 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

DOCUMENT FILING SETTINGS

Scan complete sound setting

The volume of the beep that alerts you when scanning

of an original has finished can be adjusted to two

levels.

The beep can also be turned off.

Initial resolution setting

This is used to change the default resolution setting for

"SCAN TO HDD" of the document filing function. The

default resolution is initially set to "600x600dpi". To

change the default resolution, touch the key of the

desired resolution.

Default exposure settings

This is used to change the default exposure level for

"SCAN TO HDD" of the document filing function. The

default exposure is initially set to "AUTO". If changed to

"MANUAL", the exposure level can be adjusted to five

levels. Level 1 is the lightest level and level 5 is the

darkest level.

Batch print settings

When printing files by batch printing, this setting is

used to prohibit the selection of the [ALL USERS] key

and the [USER UNKNOWN] key in the user selection

screen.

Default display setting

The default screen that appears when the

[DOCUMENT FILING] key is pressed can be specified.

Select either the base screen of document filing mode

or the external application selection screen. This

setting can only be configured when the application

communication module is installed.

When the [CA] key ([Clear all] key) is pressed in

document filing mode or Sharp OSA mode, the initial

screen of the mode appears, regardless of the default

display setting.

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 19 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 20 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

Information that the administrator of the machine requires is printed

on the back of this page.

(Separate this page from the manual and keep it in a safe place. In

addition, fill in the name of the administrator and the administrator's

contact information in the left hand margin.)

Administrator Name: Contact at:

✂

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 21 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF

THE MACHINE

(Separate this page from the manual and keep it in a safe place.)

Factory default passwords (Web pages)

There are two factory default accounts: "Administrator" and "User". A person who logs in as an

"Administrator" can configure all settings in the Web pages. A person who logs in as a "User" can only

configure certain settings.

The factory default passwords are shown below.

Forwarding all transmitted and received data to the administrator

(document administration function)

This function is used to forward all data transmitted and received by the machine to a specified destination

(Scan to E-mail address, Scan to FTP destination, Scan to Network Folder destination, or Scan to Desktop

destination).

This function can be used by the administrator of the machine to archive all transmitted and received data.

To configure the document administration settings, click [Image Send Management] and then [Document

Administration Function] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)

Factory default account Factory default password

User user Sharp

Administrator admin Sharp

NOTE

● The format, exposure, and resolution settings of transmitted and received data remain in effect when

the data is forwarded.

● The functions below cannot be used when transmitted faxes are forwarded.

Quick Online transmission, dialing using the speaker

● To use the document administration function, the network scanner expansion kit is required.

✂

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 22 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 23 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 24 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

JupiterII_Admin_sec.book 1 ページ２００６年１２月１２日　火曜日　午後５時３９分

PRINTED IN CHINA

2007D KS1

TINSE3680FCZ1

SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION

1 Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-1164.

www.sharpusa.com

SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD.

335 Britannia Road East, Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9

MX-M350U/MX-M450U/MX-M350N/MX-M450N ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS GUIDE

This manual has been printed using a vegetable-based soy oil ink

to help protect the environment.

Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper

cover3-4.fm 2 ページ２００７年４月１０日　火曜日　午後１２時５５分

MX-M450U Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Sharp MX-M450U Questions and Answers

Related Products

AR-M700N Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner

AR-M620 Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner

AR-M350 Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner

AR-M450 Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner

AR-M700U Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner

AR-M620N Sharp Printer - Copier - Fax - Scanner